Home

User Manual TDS 410A, TDS 420A & TDS 460A - TRS

1. 0 0 INA A IN TOA It To VP Um 0 Acquisitions 0 Acquisitions Old Data Start lt Old Data Continues Continue C Ta gt D C gt C CS D C gt Untriggered Roll With Single Sequence New Data Points Complete Waveform Record a N 0 ER 0 A 0 Acquisitions 04 N 0 0 Acquisitions 0 lt Old Data Start E gt gt C gt gt C CO gt C gt Triggered Roll New Data Points Start at Trigger Point Complete Waveform Record 2 pe S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p 0 0 ew Data 0 lt Old Data L After Trigger C c ec gt gt IC gt Trigger Point gt C T gt C gt Acquisition Sequence Restarts Triggered Roll With Single Sequence New Data Points Start at T
2. 2 Press one of these buttons to select from main menu 3 Press one ofthese buttons to select from side menu if displayed 4 If side menu item has an adjustable value shown in reverse video adjust it with the general purpose knob TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual At a Glance To Operate a Pop Up Menu Tektronix TDS 460A FOUR CHANNEL 400 MHz DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE 100 MS s oo Tek Run 1 00MS s Scan Period 66 6675 aa TYPE Class lt Video gt lt Custom gt Source chi Polarity Negative Scan Rate amp Interlace Scan Period 66 667 48 Rate 1 mm 15 20KHz Rate 2 20 25KH2 Rate 3 25 35KH2 Eeng Mode amp amp ee Holdoff Press to display pop ups Press again to make selection Alternatively press SHIFT first to make selection in the opposite direction A pop up selection changes the other main menu titles 2 8 Press to remove menus from screen TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual At a Glance Menu Map Acquire Menu see page 3 5 Application Menu see the Programmer manual for more details Cursor Menu see page 3 115 Delayed Trigger Menu see page 3 13 Display Menu see page 3 21 Hardcopy Menu
3. Name i OK ECDEFGHI KLMNOPQRSTUVWAYZ0123456789 amp Accept Enter Char au Delete Clear Ololololololo ejejejejle Figure 3 16 File System Labelling Menu To Copy a File or Directory To copy a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file to copy Then press the side menu Copy button The file menu reappears with the names of directories to copy to Select a directory and press the side menu button labelled Copy lt name gt to Selected Directory To copy all files select the entry The digitizing oscilloscope copies all directories recursively That means it copies both the directory and all its contents To Print a File or Directory To print a file turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file to print Then press the side menu Print button The Print To side menu should appear Select the port to print to from GPIB RS 232 or Centronics See Figure 3 16 Then the digitizing oscilloscope sends the file in its raw form out the port The device printer receiving the file must be capable or printing the particular file format TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 33 File System To Create a Directory To Set Confirm Delete To Set Overwrite Lock To Format a Disk For More Information 3 34 To cr
4. Figure B 1 TDS 400A Dimensional Drawing TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 9 Appendix B Nominal Traits B 10 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification Warranted Characteristics Performance Conditions This section lists the various warranted characteristics that describe the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes Included are electrical and environmental characteristics Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable performance limits which are warranted This section lists only warranted characteristics A list of typical characteristics starts on page B 17 The electrical characteristics found in these tables of warranted characteristics apply when the oscilloscope is adjusted at an ambient temperature between 20 C and 30 C has had a warm up period of at least 20 minutes and is operating at an ambient temperature between 0 C and 50 C unless otherwise noted Table B 9 Warranted Characteristics Signal Acquisition System Name Accuracy DC Voltage Mea surement Averaged Description Measurement Type Average of gt 16 waveforms DC Accuracy 1 5 x reading Net Offset Offset Accuracy 0 06 div Delta volts between any two averages of gt 16 waveforms 1 5 x reading 0 1 div 0 3 mV Accuracy DC Gain 1 5 Accuracy Offset Volts Div Setting Offset Accuracy
5. Ololololo 7 Horiz paired Units Video Line ee ee Figure 3 57 Video Line and IRE Units NOTE If Custom video mode is selected you also need to set the Scan Period in the Custom Video menu Press CURSOR gt Horiz Units main gt Base or 1 Base or or with Option 5 video line number side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 119 Taking Cursor Measurements Select Amplitude Units Select Cursor Speed For More Information 3 120 If you are measuring NTSC signals you can choose to display vertical readings in IRE units see Figure 3 57 If you are trying to measure such a signal you should have option 05 Video Trigger installed as it would be difficult to trigger on composite video waveforms without option 05 To switch between IRE and base cursor units do the following steps 1 Press CURSOR Amplitude Units main gt IRE NTSC 2 To return to normal press CURSOR Amplitude Units main Base To change the cursors speed pressing SHIFT before turning the general purpose knob The cursors move faster when the SHIFT button is lighted and the display reads Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner See Measurements on page 2 47 See Waveform Math on page 3 131 for information on cursor units with multiplied waveforms If your oscilloscope is equipped with the advanced DSP math option see the T
6. TYPE ass Polarity lt Video gt cat Negative weee Figure 3 64 Video Trigger Menu Mode amp Holdoff To change the holdoff time press Holdoff side Enter the value using the general purpose knob If you want to enter a large number press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light next to the SHIFT button is on and the display says Course Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly There are different default values for holdoff to insure a stable color burst in the sync pulse These holdoff values depend on whether you select NTSC PAL or SECAM and if you trigger on interlaced field one or two For More Information See Triggering on page 2 31 See Role Mode on page 3 93 3 130 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual a Fe Waveform Math The TDS 400A allows you to mathematically manipulate your waveforms For example you might have a waveform clouded by background noise You can obtain a cleaner waveform by subtracting the background noise from your original waveform This section describes the standard waveform math features invert add subtract and multiply See the TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual for information on Advanced DSP Math features if your oscilloscope is equipped with that option To Use Single Wfm Math To perform waveform math use the More menu see Figure 3 65
7. 1 00 4 5 M 1 00us chi 1 74 V Style Readout Filter Graticule Format vectors Intensity Sin xy x Full VE Oloo Ololololololo Figure 3 12 Trigger Point and Level Indicators Select Interpolation Filter The display filter types are sin x x interpolation and linear interpolation For more information see page 2 40 Press DISPLAY gt Filter main gt Sin x x Interpolation or Linear Interpo lation side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 23 Display Modes Select the Graticule Type Select the Display Format 3 24 Lou e NOTE Interpolation occurs when the horizontal scale is set to rates faster than 500 ns div and Repetitive Signal is Off or when using the ZOOM feature to expand waveforms horizontally The filter type linear or sin x x depends on which is set in the Display menu Otherwise interpolation is not needed See Sampling and Digitizing on page 2 39 for a discussion of sampling including interpolation To change the graticule Press DISPLAY Graticule main gt Full Grid Cross Hair Frame NTSC or PAL side Full provides a grid cross hairs and a frame Grid displays a frame and a grid Cross Hair provides cross hairs and a frame Frame displays just a frame NTSC provides a grid useful for measuring NTSC class waveforms
8. Figure 3 29 Measure Menu Gating The oscilloscope provides two choices histogram and min max for specifying how measure determines the High and Low levels of waveforms To use the high low setup do the following step Press MEASURE gt High Low Setup main gt Histogram or Min Max side If you select Min Max you may also want to check or revise values using the Reference Levels main menu Histogram sets the values statistically It selects the most common value either above or below the mid point depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so forth histogram is the best setting for examining pulses TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Measuring Waveforms Min max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at acommon value such as sine wave and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses Define Reference Levels Once you define the reference levels the digitizing oscilloscope uses them for all measurements requiring those levels To set the reference levels do the following steps 1 Press MEASURE gt Reference Levels main Set Levels side to choose whether the References are set in relative to High 100 and Low 0 or set explicitly in the units of the selecte
9. 1 mV div 9 95 mV div 0 4 x Net Offset2 0 9 mV 0 1 div x Vertical Scale 10 mV div 99 5 mV div 0 4 x Net Offset2 1 5 mV 0 1 divx Vertical Scale 100 mV div 995 mV div 1 V div 10 V div 0 4 x Net Offset 15 mV 0 1 div x Vertical S cale 0 4 x Net Offset2 150 mV 0 1 div x Vertical Scale Accuracy Position Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Q Coupled to BNC or to Recom mended Active Probe and Bandwidth Selection is Full Analog Bandwidth DC 1 MQ Coupled with Standard Accessory Probe and Bandwidth Selection is Full 1 5 x Position x Volts div Offset Accuracy 0 04 div Volts Div 5 mV div 10 V div 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 1 mV div 1 99 mV div Volts Div 5 mV div 10 V div 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 1 mV div 1 99 mV div TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual TDS 410A and TDS 420A TDS 460A Bandwidth Bandwidth DC 200 MHz DC 400 MHz DC 150 MHz DC 250 MHz DC 95 MHz DC 100 MHz TDS 410A and TDS 420A TDS 460A Bandwidth Bandwidth DC 200 MHz DC 350 MHz DC 150 MHz DC 250 MHz DC 100 MHz DC 100 MHz B 11 Appendix B Specification Table B 9 Warranted Characteristics Signal Acquisition System Cont Name Description Cross Talk Channel Isolation Volts Div Isolation gt 500 mV div gt 40 1 at 50 MHz for any two channels having equal volts division settings lt 9 95 mV div gt 40 1 at50 MHz for any two channels having equal volts d
10. Ch2 Coupling i l l i Impedance Ch2 Reference Indicator pe N 2 7 a Ep a s Es 7 Ir Side Menu Title DCI OIO O chi 200mV 100mV M S00us Chif 268mV i f k j 20 Em bandwidth M2 Scale position offset Full OMV 3 22 div au Ololololololo Figure 2 12 The Vertical Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu Assign Controls to Pressing a channel CH button sets the vertical controls to that channel It also Another Channel adds the channel to the display if that waveform is not already displayed To explore assigning controls to different channels do the following steps 1 Press CH 1 Observe that the side menu title shows Ch1 see Figure 2 13 and that the indicator next to CH 1 is lit Note the highlighted menu item in the side menu also changes from the 50 Q channel 2 setting to the 1 MQ impedance setting of channel 1 2 Press CH 2 gt Q side to toggle the selection to 1 MQ This returns the coupling impedance of channel 2 to its initial state 2 22 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Tek Run 100KS s Sa Impedance 50 ch Coupling Impedance Side Menu Title Ol 200mV Ch2 100mVY M 500us chi ow i a A si 50 EA Bandwidth M2 Scale position Offset Full POEMY a div av Ol
11. OS 3 6 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Acquisition Modes HiRes Mode In Hi Res mode the digitizing oscilloscope averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point That average results in a higher reso lution lower bandwidth waveform NOTE In Hi Res mode the frequency of the external clock signal must be less than or equal to the frequency set in the external clock side menu If the frequency ofthe external clock signal is greater than the frequency set in the side menu the displayed waveform will have the wrong amplitude This mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling If you set the time base so fast that it requires real time interpolation or equivalent time sampling the mode automatically becomes Sample although the menu selection does not change A key advantage of Hi Res is its potential for increasing resolution regardless of the input signal Table 3 1 and the equations shown below illustrate how you can obtain up to 15 significant bits with Hi res mode Note that the resolution improvements are limited to speeds slower than 500 ns div Also resolutions above 15 bits are not allowed by internal hardware and computation limitations The bits of resolution shown in Table 3 1 are theoretically achievable Actual resolution may vary as a function of the
12. The general purpose knob the large knob is now set to adjust the high reference level Figure 2 16 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 25 Tutorial General Purpose Knob Setting and Readout General Purpose Knob Icon Highlighted Menu Item with Boxed Readout Value 2 26 Tek Run 100KS s Sample chi Freq 999 00 Hz 4 chi width 501s chi Rise Sus resolution chi Duty 50 0 i omv M 500us Chi J 276mMV 18 Dec 1992 08 08 10 ron CO CO CO CO ae Figure 2 15 Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts Tek Run 100KS7s Sample High Ref 90 Zoomy M 300s chi 7 276mV resolution Levels Set Levels in units OS DS seta GA ree a EEE a relate i Sige 50 Select High Low Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot forech Measrmnt OFF Histogram Levels oO Cc CD CO ee ites Figure 2 16 General Purpose Knob Indicators TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Oloo Tutorial Change the Measurement By default the measurement system uses the 10 and 90 levels of the Reference Levels waveform for taking the rise time measurement You can change these values to other percentages or change the
13. 3 81 Figure 3 37 Probe Adjustment 0c cece cece reece eeee 3 82 Figure 3 38 Typical High Voltage Probes 00ee00 3 84 Figure 3 39 A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt 03 3 86 Figure 3 40 Typical GPIB Network Configuration 3 90 Figure 3 41 Stacking GPIB Connectors eeeee 3 90 Figure 3 42 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope to a Controler e Zr a are ee 3 91 Figure 3 43 Utility Menu 1 cc ccc cece cece tence nee 3 92 Figure 3 44 Roll Mode 500 Point Record Length 3 94 Figure 3 45 Trigger Mode Menu cecececececeees 3 96 Figure 3 46 Save Recall Setup Menu cece eee eeee 3 98 Figure 3 47 Save Waveform Menu ececececececes 3 102 Figure 3 48 More Menu cece cece cece cece eee eens 3 103 Figure 3 49 Save Format Menu 0 ce cecec ccc ceceeee 3 105 Figure 3 50 The Channel Readout 0 e cece eee eee 3 107 Figure 3 51 Waveform Selection Priority e000 3 109 Figure 3 52 Performing a Signal Path Compensation 3 114 Figure 3 53 Cursor Types ccccccsccccccccccscscceees 3 115 Figure 3 54 Cursor Modes cece cece cece cece eceees 3 116 Figure 3 55 H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts 3 117 Figure 3 56 Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts 3 118 Figure 3 57 Video Line and IRE Units 0 0 eee e eee
14. See Gated Measurements on page 3 63 Automated measurements are not performed just on the displayed portions of waveforms The TDS 400A Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes provide you with 25 automatic measurements Table 3 3 lists brief definitions of the automated measurements in the digitizing oscilloscope for more details see Appendix C Algorithms on page C 1 Table 3 3 Measurement Definitions Name TIE Amplitude Definition Voltage measurement The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low Area Voltage over time measurement The area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt se conds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative ft Burst Width Timing measurement The duration of a burst Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Cycle Area Voltage over time measurement The area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region in volt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative a Cycle Mean Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region te Cycle RMS Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Delay Timing measurement The time between the MidRef crossings of two d
15. cc cee cece eens 3 36 Hardcopy Formats ccccecc ccc csecscees 3 37 Date and Time Display ccccecsecscees 3 38 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope Directly to the Hardcopy Device cc ccc cess cece ccc cn sc nenne ne 3 39 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Vid a PC 2 5 are aa Bede ss 3 41 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a Converter cece cece cece cere eee eee 3 44 Record View and Time Base Readouts 3 45 Horizontal Controls cece cece cece eee 3 46 Comparing a Waveform to a Limit Template 3 53 Acquire Menu Create Limit Test Template 3 54 Measurement Readouts cecseeseeeenenennn 3 61 Measure Menu oss u 0 nn 3 62 Measure Menu Gating 2 220 cece ccs ececees 3 64 Measure Menu Reference Levels 3 66 Measure Delay Menu Delay To 06 3 67 Snapshot Menu and Readout eeeeeeee 3 68 Figure 3 32 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 33 A Probe Adds Resistance Capacitance and Ind ct nce seses csc cies 55 nn 3 71 Figure 3 34 Signal Variation Introduced by Probe Ground Lead 1 ns division ccc cece ccc e cece cece nennen nenne 3 72 Figure 3 35 Probe Accessories cece eee c weer e ee eeee 3 73 Figure 3 36 How Probe Compensation Affects Signals
16. 1 If you are not continuing from the previous example follow the instructions on page 2 13 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples 2 Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side 3 Press AUTOSET 4 Press MEASURE to display the Measure main menu see Figure 2 14 Tek Run 100KS s Sample Select Measurement ER Rise Time Fall Time Ar Positive Duty Cycle LP Negative Duty Cycle 200mV M 5004us Chi 276mV Er ne TTT CLC Fre TE 3 Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot eae Vieasrmnt OFF Histogram Levels O C OLO C O o ololololo Figure 2 14 Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement Side Menu 2 24 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial 5 Ifitis not already selected press Select Measrmnt main The readout for that menu item indicates which channel the measurement will be taken from All automated measurements are made on the selected channel The Select Measurement side menu lists some of the measurements that can be taken on waveforms There are many different measurements available up to four can be taken and displayed at any one time Pressing the button next to the more menu item displays the other measurement selections 6 Press Frequency side If the Frequency menu item is not vis
17. 3 140 And waveforms 3 135 Dual Zoom 3 137 Dual Zoom Offset 3 137 Horizontal lock 3 136 Preview 3 138 ZOOM button 3 136 Zoom feature 2 46 Zoom menu Dual Zoom 3 137 Dual Zoom Offset 3 137 Horizontal Lock 3 136 Preview 3 138 Reset Zoom Factors 3 138 Zoom Off 3 139 Zoom Off Zoom menu 3 139 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual
18. The More menu allows you to display define and manipulate math functions the following steps explain how to create a math waveform based on a single source waveform Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Math Change Math waveform definition chi 100mV M50 0us Chi f 0 Math2 Math3 Chitche FFTECHN inych OIS loBa Figure 3 65 More Menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 131 Waveform Math To Use Dual Wfm Math 3 132 1 Press MORE gt Mathl Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math waveform definition side gt Single Wfm Math main 2 To define the source waveform press Set Function to side repeatedly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform 3 Press Set Function to side repeatedly to cycle it to inv invert intg or diff Waveform integration intg and waveform differentiation diff are described in the TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual 4 Tocreate the math waveform press OK Create Math Wfm side To create a math waveform that requires two waveform sources do the following steps NOTE With Option IM and 2A there are only 120K points available for reference waveforms If you select the 120K record length in the Horizontal menu then you can only save one reference waveform Also you can only use display four waveforms Even if you do not display the
19. ps The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle If StartCycle EndCycle then CycleRMS Waveform Start Otherwise EndCycle Waveform t dt StartCycle CycleRMS EndCycle StartCycle x Samplelnterval For details of the integration algorithm see page C 12 Timing measurement The amount of time between the MidRef and Mid2Ref crossings of two different traces or two different places on the same trace Delay measurements are actually a group of measurements To get a specific delay measurement you must specify the target and reference crossing polarities and the reference search direction Delay the time from one MidRef crossing on the source waveform to the Mid2Ref crossing on the second waveform Delay is not available in the Snapshot display Timing measurement The time taken for the falling edge of a pulse to drop from a HighRef value default 90 to a LowRef value default 10 Figure C 2 shows a falling edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a Fall measurement 1 Searching from Start to End find the first sample in the measurement zone greater than HighRef 2 From this sample continue the search to find the first negative crossing of HighRef The time of this crossing is THF Use linear interpolation if necessary 3 From THF continue the search looking for a crossing of LowRef Update THF if subsequent HighRef crossings are found When a LowRef crossing is fo
20. For single shot acquisitions using sample or high resolution acquisition modes and a bandwidth limit setting of 20 MHz 1 WI 150 ppm of Reading 1 3 ns For repetitive acquisitions using average acquisition mode with gt 8 averages and a bandwidth limit setting of FULL 1 WI 150 ppm of Reading 200 ps Accuracy Delta Time For single shot acquisitions using sample or high resolution acquisition modes and a Measurement 2 bandwidth limit setting of 100 MHz 1 WI 150 ppm of Reading 650 ps For repetitive acquisitions using average acquisition mode with gt 8 averages and a bandwidth limit setting of FULL 1 WI 150 ppm of R eading 300 ps 1 For input signals gt 5 divisions in amplitude and a slew rate of gt 2 0 divisions ns at the delta time measurement points Signal must have been acquired at a volts division setting gt 5 mV division and not in Events mode 2 The WI waveform interval is the time between the samples in the waveform record Also see the footnotes for Sample Rate Range and Equivalent Time or Interpolated Waveform Rates in Table B 3 on page B 5 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 13 Appendix B Specification Table B 11 Warranted Characteristics Triggering System Name Description Accuracy Trigger Level or Threshold 2 of Setting Net Offset 0 2 div x volts div setting Offset Accuracy for any DC Coupled channel as trigger source and for s
21. General purpose knob 2 6 Measurement 2 47 3 61 3 63 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index Record view 2 6 Snapshot 3 68 Time base 2 6 Trigger 2 6 2 37 Trigger Level Bar 3 22 Trigger Point 3 22 Readout Display menu 3 22 Real time sampling 2 40 Glossary 7 Rear panel 2 5 3 91 Recall Setups 3 97 3 100 Recall Factory Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 98 3 112 Recall Saved Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 98 Recalling Waveforms 3 101 Record length 1 1 2 40 3 47 A 2 Glossary 7 Record Length Horizontal menu 3 47 Record View 2 37 2 43 3 45 Record view 2 6 Refl Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 Reference waveform status 3 103 Refl Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 Save Recall Waveform menu 3 103 Reference Indicator Channel 3 107 Reference levels 2 25 2 27 3 65 Reference Levels Measure menu 3 65 Reference memory Glossary 7 Remote communication 3 89 3 92 Remote operation Interconnect cabling 3 90 Preparation for 3 89 Procedures for 3 91 Selecting and configuring the port 3 91 Remove Measrmnt Measure menu 3 63 3 69 Rename File Utilities menu 3 32 Repetitive Signal Acquire menu 3 10 Reset Zoom Factors Zoom menu 3 138 Retractable hook tip 3 74 Ring Bell if Condition Met Acquire menu 3 56 Rise time 2 25 3 61 Glossary 7 Rising edge Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Rising edge Main Trigger menu 3 29 RLE Color Hardcopy menu 3 36 RMS 3 61 Glossary 8 Roll Glossary 8 Roll Mode 3
22. Glossary 8 Specification B 1 B 2 Specifications B 1 B 2 Spooler Hardcopy 3 40 Start up 1 3 STATUS button 3 19 Status menu 2 10 3 19 3 20 Firmware version 3 19 TO 3 19 System 3 19 Trigger 3 19 Waveforms 3 19 Stop After Limit Test Condition Met Acquire menu 3 56 Stop After Acquire menu 3 10 3 56 Style Display menu 3 21 Switch principal power 1 4 2 5 Sync Polarity Video Trigger menu 3 127 System Status menu 3 19 System Utility menu 3 36 3 91 Index 10 T Talk Listen Address Utility menu 3 91 Tek Secure 3 99 Glossary 9 Tek Secure Erase Memory Utility menu 3 99 Temperature compensation 3 113 3 114 Template Source Acquire menu 3 54 Test Data Report A 2 Text Grat Display menu 3 22 Thinkjet 3 35 Thinkjet Hardcopy menu 3 36 TIFF 3 35 TIFF Hardcopy menu 3 36 Time base Glossary 9 Time Base Horizontal menu 3 14 3 48 Time to voltage converter 3 87 TOGGLE button 2 48 Tracking Mode Cursor 2 48 Tracking Cursor menu 3 118 Trigger 2 31 2 38 3 111 Glossary 9 AC Line Voltage 2 31 Auxiliary 2 32 Coupling 2 34 2 38 Delay 2 35 Delayed 3 13 3 18 Edge 2 32 3 27 Glossary 3 Holdoff 2 33 Level 2 34 Glossary 9 Mode 2 32 Position 2 34 3 47 Readout 2 37 Slope 2 34 Status Lights 2 36 Types 2 38 Video 2 32 3 125 Trigger Bar 2 6 Trigger Bar Style Display menu 3 23 Trigger Level Bar Readout 3 22 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 2 18 2 35 TRIGGER M
23. In this example you learn how to display and control more than one waveform at a time The VERTICAL section of the front panel contains the channel selection buttons On the TDS 420 and TDS 460 Digitizing Oscilloscope they are CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 and MORE Figure 2 11 On the TDS 410 they are CH 1 CH 2 and MORE Sala O5 OCH2 VERTICAL EE ZN Figure 2 11 The Channel Buttons and Lights Each of the channel CH buttons has a light beside its label Right now the CH 1 light is on to indicate the vertical controls are set to adjust channel 1 Do the following steps to add a waveform to the display 1 If you are not continuing from the previous example follow the instructions on page 2 13 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples 2 Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side 3 Press AUTOSET 4 Press CH 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial The display shows a second waveform which represents the signal on channel 2 Since there is nothing connected to the CH 2 input connector this waveform is a flat line There are several other important things to observe m The channel readout on the display now shows the settings for both Chl and Ch2 m There are two channel indicators at the left edge of the graticule Right now they overlap m The light next to the CH 2 button is now on and the CH 1 light is off Because the kno
24. PAL provides a grid useful for measuring PAL class waveforms NOTE Selecting either NTSC or PAL graticule automatically changes the vertical scale position settings coupling and sets to zero any vertical offset of any channel displayed These settings are not restored after switching to other graticule types Therefore you might wish to recall the factory setup or other stored setup after selecting a different graticule There are two display formats YT and XY YT is the conventional oscilloscope display format It shows a signal voltage the vertical axis as it varies over time the horizontal axis XY format compares the voltage levels of two waveform records point by point That is the digitizing oscilloscope displays a graph of the voltage of one waveform record against the voltage of another waveform record This mode is particularly useful for studying phase relationships To set the display axis format Press DISPLAY Format main gt XY or YT side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Display Modes When you choose the XY mode the input you have selected is assigned to the X axis and the digitizing oscilloscope automatically chooses the Y axis input see Table 3 2 Table 3 2 XY Format Pairs X Axis Channel User Selectable Y Axis Channel Fixed Ch 1 All models Ch 2 All models Ch3 TDS 420A and TDS 460A only Ch 4 TDS 420A and TDS 460A only For example if you press the CH
25. Sect 1 8 1 are complied with HINWEIS f r den Benutzer Betreiber Dieses Ger t darf in Me aufbauten nur betrieben werden wenn die Voraussetzungen des Par 2 Ziff 1 8 1 der Vfg 243 1991 eingehalten werden Tektronix EC Declaration of Conformity Tektronix Holland N V Marktweg 73A 8444 AB Heerenveen The Netherlands declare under sole responsibility that the TDS 410A Digitizing Oscilloscope TDS 420A Digitizing Oscilloscope TDS 460A Digitizing Oscilloscope meet the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official Journal of the European Communities EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 55011 Radiated Class A EN 55011 Conducted Class A EN 60555 2 Power Harmonics EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 801 3 RF Radiated IEC 801 4 Fast Transients IEC 801 5 Surge SSS Table of Contents Getting Started Operating Basics Reference Eist f Figures oeiee nu ales iii List of Tables 3 3u 3u San vii General Safety Summary esssessssesesesesessoececesesesee ix Preface ns Ren xi Product Description cc cece cee c cece cece eee ee nenne 1 1 Start Up u 3 we ea 1 3 Functional Overview 0 cece cece cece cece cece cece sees 2 1 AtaGlance assnnes mn aan aa Bean 2 3 Tutorial 2 ne EE E A e 2 13 Overview a en ee ee seen 3 1 ACCESSING Help 2 28 en 3 3 Acquisit
26. Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 17 Delayed Triggering NOTE When you set the Vertical SCALE smaller than 200 mV the oscilloscope reduces the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels That happens because the trigger level range is fixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V and ECL 1 3 V levels Set to 50 fixes the delayed trigger level to 50 of the peak to peak value of the delayed trigger source signal For More Information See Triggering on page 2 31 3 18 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual DEE y Determining Status To Display the Status Firmware Date The Status menu lets you see information about the oscilloscope state To display the Status men u Press SHIFT STATUS gt Status main gt System Trigger Waveforms or T O side System displays information about the Horizontal Zoom Acquisition Display Measure and Hardcopy systems see Figure 3 9 This display also tells you the firmware creation date Trigger displays information about the triggers Waveforms displays information about the various waveforms including live math and reference T O displays information about the I O port s Tek Run I Sample Horiz Sca e ode Main 3
27. The trigger position indicator shows position You can position it horizontally off screen especially wi th long record length settings The trigger level bar shows only the trigger level and remains on screen regardless of the horizontal position as long as the channel providing the trigger source is displayed Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample 0 H i om sp Cat F 200mV Ololololo oo ea o Figure 2 24 Record View Trigger Position and Trigger Level Bar Readouts Trigger Status Screen To see a more comprehensive status listing of the settings for the main and delayed trigger systems press SHIFT STATUS gt STATUS main gt TRIGGER side Trigger Menu Each trigger type edge and video has its own main trigger menu which is described in a separate part of this manual see For More Informa tion To select the trigger type press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge For more triggering information see Edge Triggering on page 3 27 Delay Triggering on page 3 13 Video Triggering on page 3 125 and Horizontal Control on page 3 45 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Acquisition Sampling and Digitizing Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal converting it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record The oscilloscope creates a digita
28. UL 1244 Second Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 231 M89 1 Maximum operating temperature is decreased 1 C per 1000 feet 305 meters above 5000 feet 1525 meters 2 To maintain emission requirements when connecting to the IEEE 488 GPIB interface of this oscilloscope use only a high quality double shielded braid and foil GPIB cable The cable shield must have low impedance connections to both connector housings Acceptable cables are Tektronix part numbers 012 0991 00 01 and 02 3 To maintain emission requirements when connecting to the VGA compatible video output of this oscilloscope use only a high quality double shielded braid and foil video cable with ferrite cores at both ends The cable shield must have low impedance connections to both connector housings An acceptable cable is LCOM part number CTL3VGAMN 5 4 Does not apply to a rackmounted instrument 5 Does not apply to an instrument with Option 1F B 16 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification Typical Characteristics This section contains tables that list the various typical characteristics that describe the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average performance Typical characteristics are not warranted This subsection lists only typical characteristics A list of warranted characteris tics starts on page B 11 Table B 15 Typical Characteristics Signal Acquisition S
29. With this option the oscilloscope can compute and display three advanced math waveforms integral of a waveform differential of a waveform and an FFT Fast Fourier Transform of a waveform With this option Tektronix ships a Seiko DPU 411 thermal printer cables and manual and an accessory pouch for mounting to the top of the oscilloscope Hardcopies of the screen are produced on four inch thermal paper The pouch holds the printer and has additional room for accessories This option combines Option 1M 120 000 point records and Option 05 Video Trigger TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A 1 Appendix A Options and Accessories Options A1 A5 International Power Cords Option 1M 120 000 Point Record Length Option 1K K212 Instrument Cart Option 1R Rackmounted Digitizing Oscilloscope Option 22 Additional Probes Option 28 Analog Differential Amplifier Option 95 Test Data Report A 2 Besides the standard North American 110 V 60 Hz power cord Tektronix ships any of five alternate power cord configurations listed in Table A 1 with the oscilloscope when ordered by the customer Table A 1 International Power Cords Option Power Cord Al Universal European 220 V 50 Hz A2 UK 240 V 50 Hz A3 Australian 240 V 50 Hz A4 North American 240 V 60 Hz A5 Switzerland 220 V 50 Hz This option provides a maximum record length of 120 000 points per acquisition
30. Zoom horizontal position all channels TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 50 0 5 the middle of the display Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings Table E 1 Factory Initialization Defaults Cont Control Changed by Factory Init to Zoom state Off Zoom vertical all channels 2 0X Zoom vertical position all channels 0 divs E 4 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix F Remote Display You can connect a remote display to the VGA connector on the rear panel Table A 4 on page A 5 gives the part number of a properly shielded cable that is commercially available NOTE Both the red and blue signal lines are grounded This configuration results in a green display on a color monitor TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual F 1 Appendix F Remote Display F 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary ACO AC coupling A type of signal transmission that blocks the DC component of a signal but uses the dynamic AC component Useful for observing an AC signal that is normally riding on a DC signal Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Acquisition interval The time dura
31. lighted when on before turning the general purpose horizontal position or vertical position knobs when you want increased knob response Less knob rotation produces greater changes in settings with Help off press SHIFT after pressing any menu button that toggles through multiple settings such as those for pop up menus Pressing SHiF7 reverses the direction in which the pop up menu or button label toggles through the menu or parameter settings Si 100mV M 500us Chi IM O CO O OSOS SSI Figure 3 1 Initial Help Screen 34 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual SSS es Acquisition Modes Description of Modes Sample Mode lhe Peak Detect Mode ala The acquisition system has several options for converting analog data into digital form The Acquisition menu lets you determine the acquisition mode whether or not to permit equivalent time sampling and how to start and stop acquisitions The digitizing oscilloscope supports five acquisition modes m Sample m Peak Detect m Hi Res m Envelope m Average The Sample Peak Detect and Hi Res modes operate in real time on a single trigger event provided the digitizing oscilloscope can acquire enough samples for each trigger event Envelope and Average modes operate on multiple acquisitions The digitizing oscilloscope averages or envelopes several wave forms on a point by point basis Figure 3
32. main or delayed being referred to See Figure 3 23 Also see Figure 2 29 on page 2 43 Since all live waveforms use the same time base the digitizing oscilloscope only displays one value for all the active channels Tek Run 100MS e Record View Time Base Main Only Intensified a Delayed Only Delayed Runs on ns After Main Delayed 172m BES see Delayed Trig Menu OS Time Base Readout internal oJjo1o oJo OoJO Figure 3 23 Record View and Time Base Readouts TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 45 Horizontal Control To Change Horizontal Scale and Position 3 46 TDS 400A oscilloscopes provide control of horizontal position and scale using either the horizontal front panel knobs or the horizontal menu This section describes how to use both the knobs and the menu to adjust your waveforms By changing the horizontal scale you can focus on a particular portion of a waveform By adjusting the horizontal position you can move the waveform right or left to see different portions of the waveform That is particularly useful when you are using larger record sizes and cannot view the entire waveform on one screen NOTE If external clock is enabled and zoom is disabled the horizontal scale is set to 50 c indicating 50 clocks per division and the Horizontal SCALE knob h
33. see page 3 35 Horizontal Menu see page 3 45 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Press these buttons ACQUIRE MENU APPLICATION MEASURE Cc C CURSOR CO TRIGGER MENU ee ae UTILITY DISPLAY Cy MENU HORIZONTAL MENU To bring up these menus Ne Se PEUVE stop After Limit Test Limit Test teale Signal Limit Test N A S button Setup Sources Template Mode Oriz mplitude Units Units indep Base Base coupling slope Level Delay by DC TsmlV Time Style Readout Filter Graticule Format Intensity options sintx sx Full VF Layout Port Clear File Portrait File Spool Utilities er ecor g Horiz Horiz clock a Length Controls Pos Internal At a Glance Press these buttons To bring up these menus DELAYED TRIG Main Tigger Menu Ed en ve ain Trigger Menu Edge ka coupling Slope Level ade see page 3 27 C lt Eipe gt ne u 4 30mV Holdott M M APPLICATION easure Menu MEASURE select Remove Gatin igh OW Reference Measrmnt g Setup Snapshot see page 3 59 C Anpa Vieasrmnt OFF Histogram Levels More Menu O MORE niig Math2_ Math3 i i Refi RefZ Reli Reis see page 3 131 CD ch I ch2 Ch1 cCh2 inv ch1 Save Recall Setup Menu SETUP Recall Mmm Med File ave urren actor File see page 3 97 C Setu Setup setup Utilities SAVE RECALL en Menu WAVEFORM Recall wfm save wim Delete Paar utile see page 3 ORE ers Intern
34. then RMS the interpolated value at Waveform Start Otherwise End Waveform t dt Start We End Start x Samplelnterval For details of the integration algorithm see below TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 11 Appendix C Algorithms Integration Algorithm The integration algorithm used by the digitizing oscilloscope is as follows B is approximated by p8 where W t dt W t dt A A W t is the sampled waveform W t is the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W t A and B are numbers between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 If A and B are integers then B B 1 i a Some A i A where s is the sample interval Similarly is approximated by p8 2 where wo dt B WA dt A A W t is the sampled waveform WA is the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W t A and B are numbers between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 If A and B are integers then wo dt i ages yo Wi x Wi 1 WG D A i A where s is the sample interval Measurements on Envelope Waveforms C 12 Time measurements on envelope waveforms must be treated differently from time measurements on other waveforms because envelope waveforms contain so many apparent crossings Unless otherwise noted envelope waveforms use either the minima or the maxima but not both determined in the following manner 1 Step through the waveform from Start to End un
35. wa Ve Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope acquires signals over many repetitions of the event The TDS 400A Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes use a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling It utilizes an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The oscilloscope takes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger Fall time A measurement of the time it takes the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef value typically 90 to a LowRef value typically 10 of its amplitude Frequency A timing measurement that is the reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary GND Glossary 4 Gated Measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors General purpose knob The large front panel knob You can use it t
36. 120 000 channel With this option Tektronix ships a three tray instrument cart the K212 Tektronix ships the digitizing oscilloscope when ordered with Option 1R configured for installation in a 19 inch wide instrument rack Customers with instruments not configured for rackmounting can order a rackmount kit 016 1166 00 for field conversions Instructions for rackmounting the digitizing oscilloscope are shipped with the option 1R With this option Tektronix ships two additional probes identical to the two standard accessory P6138 probes normally shipped with the instrument This provides one probe for each front panel input With this option Tektronix ships an ADA400A Analog Differential Amplifier This provides one differential input pair for a front panel input With this option Tektronix ships a test data report for the oscilloscope TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Option 96 Certificate of Tektronix ships a Certificate of Calibration which states this instrument meets or Calibration exceeds all warranted specifications and was calibrated using standards and instruments whose accuracies are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology an accepted value of a natural physical constant or a ratio calibration technique The calibration is in compliance with US MIL STD 45662A TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A 3 Appendix A Options and
37. 20 MHz side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 81 Probe Compensation 4 If you need to change the input impedance press Coupling main Then toggle the side menu selection Q to get the correct impedance 5 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Mode main gt Hi Res side 6 Adjust the probe until you see a perfectly flat top square wave on the display Figure 3 37 shows where the adjustment is located Figure 3 37 Probe Adjustment For More Information See Probe Accessories on page 3 71 See Probe Selection on page 3 83 3 82 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Selection The probes included with your digitizing oscilloscope are useful for a wide variety oftasks However for special measurement situations you sometimes need different probes This section introduces the five major types of probes passive active current optical and time to voltage and helps you select the right probe for the job See your Tektronix Products Catalog for more information Passive Voltage Probes General Purpose High Input Resistance Probes Low Impedance Zo Probes Passive voltage probes measure voltage They employ passive circuit compo nents such as resistors capacitors and inductors There are three common classes of passive voltage probes m General purpose high input resistance m Low impedance Zo m High voltage High input resistance probes are considered typical
38. 3 Acquisition Menu and Readout Selecting an Acquisition Mode The oscilloscope provides several acquisition modes To bring up the acquisition menu Figure 3 3 and choose how the digitizing oscilloscope creates points in the waveform record Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Mode main gt Sample Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope or Average side NOTE If you select a 120000 point record length you cannot select Hi Res mode TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 9 Acquisition Modes When you select Envelope or Average you can enter the number of waveform records to be enveloped or averaged using the general purpose knob Selecting Repetitive Sampling 3 10 To Stop After To limit the digitizing oscilloscope to real time sampling or let it choose between real time or equivalent time sampling Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Repetitive Signal main gt ON or OFF side ON Enable ET uses both the real time and the equivalent time features of the digitizing oscilloscope The digitizing oscilloscope automatically switches to equivalent time sampling when the horizontal scale is faster than 25 ns otherwise it uses real time sampling OFF Real Time Only limits the digitizing oscilloscope to real time sampling If the digitizing oscilloscope cannot accurately get enough samples for a complete waveform the oscilloscope uses the interpolation method selected in the display menu to fill in the missing record
39. 3 119 Figure 3 58 Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu 3 122 Figure 3 59 Main Trigger Menu Video Type 3 125 Figure 3 60 Video Trigger Menu Class 0eceeeeees 3 126 Figure 3 61 Video Trigger Menu TV Delay Mode 3 127 Figure 3 62 Video Trigger Scan Parameter 6 3 128 Figure 3 63 Video Trigger Scan Rate amp Interlace 3 129 Figure 3 64 Video Trigger Menu Mode amp Holdoff 3 130 Figure 3 65 More Menu ccc cece cece cece ewer eeeees 3 131 Figure 3 66 Dual Waveform Math Menus eee0 3 133 Figure 3 67 Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None 3 137 Figure 3 68 Zoom Preview Mode cecececececeees 3 138 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual V Table of Contents vi Figure B 1 TDS 400A Dimensional Drawing B 9 Figure C 1 MCross Calculations 0 cccceccscsceeces C 4 Figure 2 Fall Time een oS Ga C 7 Figure C 3 Rise Time 0 ccc cece cess cc ccecccnscsscccns C 11 Figure C 4 Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope Me surements sis sesio ie een C 14 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers cccccc000 1 4 Table 3 1 Resolution Bits 0 ccc cece cece cee eee e eens 3 8 Table 3 2 XY Format Pairs cece
40. 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Saving and Recalling Waveforms Tek Run 100MS s E Save Format Internal Spreadsheet Mathcad CIC O O 200mV i y M 500ns chi 28mv rn Recall wfm Save wfm Delete File pormat liti to Ref ch Refs Internal Utilities Ololololololo Figure 3 49 Save Format Menu To View a Waveform on a Spreadsheet To save a waveform and view the waveform data using a spreadsheet this example uses EXCEL 1 With a disk in the disk drive press save recall WAVEFORM gt Save Format main gt Spreadsheet side Press Save Wfm main To File side Then press Save to Selected File side Remove the disk and place it in your computer drive Start EXCEL Using the EXCEL File menu select Open From the List Files of Type menu select Text Files prn txt csv From the Drives menu select the drive containing the waveform file From the File Name menu select the name of the waveform file Now select OK For information on the CSV data format see To Select the Save Format on page 3 104 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 105 Saving and Recalling Waveforms For More Information See Selecting Channels on page 3 107 See File System on page 3 31 3 106 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual ee Selecting Channels T
41. 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 91 Remote Communication Tek Run 100kS s S GPIB Address 1 coe amp GPIB Configuration E Talk Listen Address GPIB Configuration Menu Hardcopy Talk Only Off Bus Olololo 2oomv TO M 500s Chit 20mv configure System Port igu lt O gt lt cpie gt r du Ololololololo Figure 3 43 Utility Menu For More Information See Hardcopy on page 3 35 See the TDS Family Programmer Manual See the TDS Family Option 13 Instruction Manual Option 13 equipped instruments only 3 92 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Roll Mode Roll Modes Untriggered Roll Untriggered Roll with Single Sequence Roll mode lets you see acquired data points without waiting for the acquisition of acomplete waveform record Roll mode gives you almost immediate feedback For example when a sweep is 10 divisions long and the sweep rate is 1 second per division 10 seconds are required to fill the waveform record Without roll mode you must wait 10 seconds to see that the position control is set wrong With roll mode you can start seeing results almost immediately There are four roll modes see Figure 3 44 m Untriggered roll m Untriggered roll with single sequence m Triggered roll m Triggered roll with single sequence Untriggered roll mode displays new
42. 45 Tutorial 2 46 Zoom Autoset For More Information The delayed time base is useful in catching events that follow other events See Delay Triggering on page 3 13 for more information on the delayed trigger You can use zoom to see more detail without changing the acquired signal When you press the ZOOM button a portion of the waveform record can be expanded or compressed on the display but the record points stay the same Zoom is very useful when you wish to temporarily expand a waveform to inspect small feature s on that waveform For example you might use zoom to temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations Use zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically After you are finished return to your original horizontal scale setting by pressing one menu button The zoom feature is also handy if you have acquired a waveform while using the fastest time per division and want to further expand horizontally Zoom on page 3 135 describe in detail what zoom does Autoset lets you quickly obtain a stable waveform display Autoset automatically adjusts a wide variety of settings including vertical and horizontal scaling Other settings affected include trigger coupling type position slope mode and display intensities Setting Up Automatically Autoset and Reset on page 3 111 describes in detail what autoset does For more information on scaling and positioning waveforms see Setting Up Automatic
43. 93 3 96 Triggered 3 95 Triggered with Single Sequence 3 95 Untriggered 3 93 Untriggered with Single Sequence 3 93 Using 3 95 RS 232 Port optional 3 89 RS 232 Port optional 3 37 3 43 RUN STOP Acquire menu 3 11 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual S Sample acquisition mode 3 5 Glossary 8 Sample interval Glossary 8 Sample Acquire menu 3 9 Sampling 2 40 2 41 Glossary 8 Save Setups 3 97 3 100 Save Current Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 97 Save Format Save Recall Waveform menu 3 104 Save Waveform Save Recall Waveform menu 3 101 Save Recall SETUP button 3 31 3 97 Save recall SETUP button 2 14 Save Recall Setup menu 2 10 3 97 factory status 3 97 File Utilities 3 99 Recall Factory Setup 3 98 3 112 Recall Saved Setup 3 98 Save Current Setup 3 97 user status 3 97 Save Recall WAVEFORM button 3 31 3 101 Save Recall Waveform menu 2 10 3 101 active status 3 101 Delete Refs 3 102 empty status 3 101 File Utilities 3 103 Refl Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 3 103 Save Format 3 104 Save Waveform 3 101 Saving and recalling setups 2 29 3 97 Saving and recalling waveforms 3 101 Scan Parameter Video Trigger menu 3 128 SECAM Video Standard 3 126 SECAM Video Trigger menu 3 126 seconds Cursor menu 3 119 SELECT button 3 118 Glossary 9 Select Measrmnt Measure menu 3 62 3 66 Selected waveform Glossary 8 Selecting channels 3 107 Self test 1 5 Service Assurance A 8 Set 1
44. A solid line indicates the adjustable cursor and a dashed line indicates the fixed cursor Press SELECT to toggle between cursors m To adjust both cursors in tracking mode use the general purpose knob to move both cursors m To adjust the distance between cursors in tracking mode press SELECT to temporarily suspend cursor tracking Then use the general purpose knob to 3 118 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Taking Cursor Measurements adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor Press SELECT again to resume tracking m To speed up or slow down adjustment of a cursor press SHIFT before turning the general purpose knob The cursor moves faster when the SHIFT button is lighted and the display reads Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner Select Horizontal Units You can choose to display vertical bar cursor results in the base horizontal units of the waveform or in 1 base horizontal units of the waveform For internally clocked waveforms the units are time or frequency for externally clocked waveforms the units are clocks or 1 clocks If you have Option 5 Video you can also display the results in terms of video line number see Figure 3 57 To choose vertical bar cursor units do the following step Tek Run 500KS7s Sample amp Horizontal Video Line and IRE Units a 11 Units Base 17 Base AN bisa Line Number f
45. Accessories Standard Accessories A 4 Probe Accessories Table A 2 lists the standard accessories that are included with the digitizing oscilloscope Table A 2 Standard Accessories Accessory Part Number User Manual 070 9219 XX Programmer Manual 070 8709 XX Reference 070 9220 XX Performance Verification 070 9218 XX U S Power Cord 161 0230 01 Probes qty two P6138 10X Passive P6138 single unit Table A 3 lists accessories to the standard probe listed previously P6138 Except for the probe tip to circuit board adapter you can also order them separately Table A 3 Probe Accessories Accessory Retractable Hook Tip Body Shell tip cover Probe Tip to Circuit Board Adapter qty two standard optionally available in package of 25 as 131 5031 00 Part Number 013 0107 XX 204 1049 00 No customer orderable part number for double unit 6 Inch Slip On Ground Lead 196 3113 02 Low Inductance Ground Lead 195 4240 00 Marker Rings Set qty eighteen rings which includes two each 016 0633 00 of nine colors Ground Collar 343 1003 01 6 Inch Alligator Clip Ground Lead 196 3305 00 Screwdriver adjustment tool metal tip 003 1433 00 SMT KlipChip 206 0364 00 Accessory Pouch 016 0708 00 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Optional Accessories You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table A 4 Table A 4 Optional Accessor
46. Algorithms MidR ef Hysteresis x Amplitude MidRef MidRef Hysteresis x Amplitude StartCycle is the starting time for cycle measurements It is a floating point number with values between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 inclusive StartCycle MCross1 EndCycle is the ending time for cycle measurements It is a floating point number with values between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 inclusive EndCycle MCross3 MCross1 StartCycle N MCross3 MCross2 EndCycle 2 3 Figure C 1 MCross Calculations Waveform lt 0 0 RecordLength 1 0 gt holds the acquired data TPOS is the location of the sample just before the trigger point the time reference zero sample In other terms it contains the domain reference location This location is where time 0 TSOFF is the offset between TPOS and the actual trigger point In other words it is the trigger sample offset Values range between 0 0 and 1 0 samples This value is determined by the instrument when it receives a trigger The actual zero reference trigger location in the measurement record is at TPOS TSOFF Measurement Algorithms Amplitude C 4 The automated measurements are defined and calculated as follows Amplitude High Low TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms Area The arithmetic area for one waveform Remember that one waveform is not necessarily equal t
47. Chl Ch2 Video Trigger menu 3 126 Change Math waveform definition More menu 3 132 Channel 3 107 3 110 Glossary 2 Readout 2 6 3 107 3 136 Reference Indicator 2 6 3 107 Selection buttons 2 20 3 108 Trigger input 2 31 2 38 Channel readout 2 6 Channel reference indicator Glossary 2 Circuit loading Glossary 2 CLEAR MENU button 2 3 2 8 2 16 2 25 3 67 Clear Spool Hardcopy menu 3 40 Clock Horizontal menu 3 49 Compact to miniature probe tip adapter 3 78 A 6 Compare Ch1 to Acquire menu 3 55 Compare Ch2 to Acquire menu 3 55 Compensation 3 81 Index 2 Configure Utility menu 3 36 3 91 Confirm Delete File Utilities menu 3 34 Connector BNC A 6 GPIB 2 5 3 90 Contrast Display menu 3 22 Conventions xii Copy File Utilities menu 3 33 Coupling 2 21 AC 2 34 DC 2 34 Ground Glossary 4 Input Signal 2 42 Trigger 2 34 2 38 Coupling Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Coupling Main Trigger menu 3 28 Coupling Vertical menu 3 122 Create Directory File Utilities menu 3 34 Create Limit Test Template Acquire menu 3 54 Create Measrmnt Measure Delay menu 3 67 Cross Hair Display menu 3 24 Current probes 3 86 Cursor Faster positioning 3 119 Horizontal bar 2 48 3 115 Measurements 2 48 Mode 2 48 Independent 2 48 Tracking 2 48 Paired 2 48 3 115 Vertical bar 2 48 3 115 CURSOR button 3 117 Cursor menu 3 117 1 Base 3 119 1 Clocks 3 119 1 seconds Hz
48. Circuit Board 3 76 Adapters SMT KlipChip The probe tip to circuit board adapters let you design minimum inductance test points into your next circuit board That adapter provides maximum performance for the probe because it virtually eliminates the ground inductance effects of the probe Instructions for installing the probe tip to circuit board adapters are packaged with the adapters For the best performance and ease of testing Tektronix strongly recommends that you incorporate the probe tip to circuit board adapters or the probe tip to chassis adapters described below into your next design To use your probe with these adapters unscrew and remove the ribbed ferrule Use the probe tip directly with the adapter S cO 0 3 0 The SMT KlipChip provides hands free attachment to a physically small signal or ground source The low profile of the KlipChip allows you to grasp surface mounted devices that the full size retractable hook tip can not grip TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Accessories You can use the KlipChip as a ground attachment as a signal attachment or to attach both to a ground and a signal m Fora ground attachment use the long ground lead described on page 3 74 terminated with a pin receptacle and connect the termination to the pin in one of the KlipChip shoulders m Fora signal attachment use a single lead adapter similar to the dual lead adapter
49. FV MFG0 5 Ae Options 05 13 1F 2F c Copyright Tektronix Inc 1991 1995 All rights reserved Power On self check PASSED Push CLEAR MENU to proceed Toomv M 500ns Chi F ON STBY Button Tas ON I STBY Figure 1 2 ON STBY Button Self Test The digitizing oscilloscope automatically performs power on tests each time it is turned on It comes up with a display screen that states whether or not it passed self test If the self test does not detect any problems the status display screen disappears a few seconds after the self test is complete Check the self test results If the self test fails call your local Tektronix Service Center Depending on the type of failure you may still be able to use the oscilloscope before it is serviced Power Off Press the ON STBY switch to turn off the oscilloscope Before You Begin Signal Path Compensation SPC lets you compensate your oscilloscope for the current ambient temperature SPC helps ensure maximum possible accuracy for your most critical measurements See Signal Path Compensation on page 3 113 for a description of and operating information on this key feature TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 1 5 Start Up 1 6 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual EEE eee Functional Overview This chapter describes the basic concepts of operating the digitizing oscillos
50. Figure 3 19 The date and time is removed from the display when menus are displayed 4 Press HARDCOPY to print your date time stamped hardcopy TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 37 Hardcopy To Set the Date and Time If you need to set the date and time of the oscilloscope do the following steps 1 Press SHIFT UTILITY gt Config pop up gt Set Date amp Time main gt Year Day Month Hour or Minute Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample OGIO en am a 500us Chi f 220m 12 Jul 1994 Date and Time Display ee ololololololo Figure 3 19 Date and Time Display 2 Use the general purpose knob to set the parameter you have chosen to the value desired 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set other parameters as desired 4 Press OK Enter Date Time side to put the new settings into effect This sets the seconds to zero NOTE When setting the clock you can set to a time slightly later than the current time and wait for it to catch up When current time catches up to the time you have set pressing Ok Enter Date Time side synchronizes the set time to the current time 5 Press CLEAR MENU to see the date time displayed with the new settings 3 38 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Hardcopy To Print Directly toa To make your hardcopies use the procedures that follow Hardcopy Device Connect to
51. MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Measuring Waveforms 2 Select a measurement from the side menu Note the following rules for taking automatic measurements m You can only take a maximum of four measurements at a time To add a fifth you must remove one or more of the existing measurements m To vary the source for measurements simply select the other channel and then choose the measurements you want m Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals You might measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform Your digitizing oscilloscope helps identify such situations by displaying a low signal amplitude or low resolution warning message Remove Measurements The Remove Measrmnt selection provides explicit choices for removing measurements from the display according to their readout position To remove measurements do the following steps 1 Press MEASURE Remove Measrmnt main 2 Select the measurement to remove from the side menu If you want to remove all the measurements at one time press All Measurements side Gate Measurements The gating feature lets you limit measurements to a specified portion of the waveform When gating is Off the oscilloscope makes measurements over the entire waveform record When gating is ON vertical cursors are displayed Use these cursors to define the section of the waveform you want the oscilloscope
52. Rising Delayed edge trigger source Channel 1 Delay trigger average 16 Delay trigger envelope 10 Delay time delayed runs after main 10 ns Delay time delayed triggerable after main 60 ns TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings Table E 1 Factory Initialization Defaults Cont Control Delay events triggerable after main Delayed delay by Delayed time base mode Changed by Factory Init to 2 Delay by Time Delayed Runs After Main Display clock No Change Display format YT Display graticule type Full Display intensity contrast 125 Display intensity text 60 Display intensity waveform 80 Display intensity overall 85 Display interpolation filter Sin x x Display style Vectors Display trigger bar style Short Display trigger T On Display variable persistence 500 ms Edge trigger coupling DC Edge trigger level 0 0V Edge trigger slope Rising Edge trigger source Channel 1 External clock 10 Mc s Max Fit to screen Off File utilities confirm delete On File utilities overwrite lock On Horizontal clock Internal Horizontal delay trigger position 50 Horizontal delay trigger record length 500 points 10 divs Horizontal delay time division 50 us Horizontal main trigger position 50 Horizontal main trigger record length 500 points 10 divs Horizontal main time division 500 us Hori
53. Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 101 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Hardcopy Supported Formats You can get a copy of the digitizing oscilloscope display by using the hardcopy feature This section lists hardcopy formats and describes how to setup and execute a hardcopy Different hardcopy devices use different formats Depending on the output format you select you create either an image or a plot Images are direct bit map representations of the digitizing oscilloscope display Plots are vector plotted representations of the display The digitizing oscilloscope supports the following formats m HP Thinkjet inkjet printer m HP Deskjet inkjet printer m HP Laserjet laser printer m Seiko DPU 411 412 portable thermal printer m HPGL Color Plot Epson Interleaf m Tag Image File Format TIFF m PC Paintbrush PCX m Microsoft Windows file format BMP m Encapsulated Postscript Image Mono Plot and Color Plot Some formats particularly Interleaf Postscript TIFF PCX BMP and HPGL are compatible with various desktop publishing packages That means you can paste files created from the oscilloscope directly into a document on any of those desktop publishing systems EPS Mono and Color formats are compatible with the Tektronix Phaser Color Printer HPGL is compatible with the Tektronix HC100 Plotter and Epson is compatible with the Tektronix HC200 Printer TDS 410A TDS 420A am
54. Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler CAUTION Do not ship the digitizing oscilloscope with a disk inside the disk drive When the disk is inside the drive the disk release button sticks out This makes the button more prone to damage than otherwise TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual D 1 Appendix D Packaging for Shipment D 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual y eee Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings Settings The factory initialization settings provide you a known state for the digitizing oscilloscope Factory initialization sets values as shown in Table E 1 Table E 1 Factory Initialization Defaults Control Changed by Factory Init to Acquire mode Sample Acquire repetitive signal Acquire stop after Acquire of averages ON Enable ET RUN STOP button only 16 Acquire of envelopes 10 Channel selection Cursor H Bar 1 position Cursor H Bar 2 position Channel 1 on all others off 10 of graticule height 3 2 divs from the center 90 of the graticule height 3 2 divs from the center Cursor V Bar 1 position 10 of the record length Cursor V Bar 2 position 90 of the record length Cursor mode Independent Cursor function Off Cursor horizontal units Base Cursor amplitude units Base Delayed edge trigger coupling DC Delayed edge trigger level OV Delayed edge trigger slope
55. Std 488 2 1987 GPIB cable into the GPIB connector on the oscilloscope rear panel and into the GPIB port on your controller see Figure 3 42 Controller Digitizing Oscilloscope Rear Panel Figure 3 42 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope to a Controller Select the GPIB Port To select the GPIB port press SHIFT gt UTILITY gt System main gt I O pop up gt Port main gt GPIB pop up Configure the GPIB Port You must set two important GPIB parameters mode and address Do the following to set those parameters Press SHIFT UTILITY System main gt I O pop up gt Port main gt GPIB pop up gt Configure main gt Talk Listen Address Hardcopy Talk Only or Off Bus side See Figure 3 43 Talk Listen Address configures the port for normal controller based system operation Use the general purpose knob to define the address Hardcopy Talk Only configures the port for hardcopy output without controller supervision Once the port is configured this way the oscilloscope will send the hardcopy data to any listeners on the bus when the HARDCOPY button is pressed If the port is configured any other way when the HARDCOPY button is pressed an error occurs and the digitizing oscilloscope displays a message saying the selected hardcopy port is currently unavailable Off Bus disconnects the digitizing oscilloscope from the bus TDS 410A TDS
56. Trigger menu 3 126 Video Line Number Cursor menu 3 119 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Video Output Acceptable Cable B 16 Description B 6 Video Standards 3 126 Video Trigger NTSC Standard 3 126 PAL Standard 3 126 SECAM Standard 3 126 Standards 3 126 Video trigger 2 32 3 125 Video Trigger Menu Neg Sync 3 127 Pos Sync 3 127 Video Trigger menu 3 125 Auto 3 129 Ch1 Ch2 3 126 Custom 3 126 Delay by Lines 3 127 Delay by Time 3 127 Interlaced Field One 3 128 Interlaced Field Two 3 128 Mode amp Holdoff 3 129 NonInterlaced Both Fields 3 128 Normal 3 129 NTSC 3 126 PAL 3 126 Rate 1 3 129 Rate 2 3 129 Rate 3 3 129 Rate 4 3 129 Scan Parameter 3 128 SECAM 3 126 Source 3 126 Sync Polarity 3 127 TV Delay Mode 3 127 Video Class 3 126 Video Main Trigger menu 3 125 3 126 W Warranted Characteristics Defined B 11 Listed B 11 Performance Conditions for B 11 Waveform Glossary 9 Interval Glossary 9 Math 3 131 3 134 Off priority 3 108 Waveform memory 3 102 WAVEFORM OFF button 2 23 3 25 3 108 Waveform Rate B 5 Waveform Display menu 3 22 Index 11 Index Waveforms And zoom 3 135 Math 3 133 Waveforms Status menu 3 19 Width 2 25 Glossary 6 Glossary 7 X XY Format 3 24 XY format Glossary 9 XY Display menu 3 24 Y YT Format 3 24 YT format Glossary 9 YT Display menu 3 24 Index 12 Z Zoom 3 135
57. You can make automated measurements on the entire waveform record or just on a specific part The gating selection in the Measurement menu lets you use the vertical cursors to limit the measurement to a section of the waveform record Automated measurements use readouts to show measurement status These readouts are updated as the oscilloscope acquires new data or if you change settings TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 47 Tutorial The snapshot selection in the Measurement menu lets you display almost all of the measurements at once You can read about snapshot under Take a Snapshot of Measurements on page 3 68 Cursor Measurements Cursors are fast and easy to understand measurements You take measurements by moving the cursors and reading their numeric values from the on screen readouts which update as you adjust their positions Cursors appear in pairs one cursor is active and the other inactive You move the active cursor the solid line using the general purpose knob Press the SELECT button to select toggle which cursor bar is active or inactive The inactive cursor is a dashed line on the display To get the cursor menu press the CURSOR button There are three kinds of cursors available in that menu m Horizontal bar cursors measure vertical parameters typically volts m Vertical bar cursors measure horizontal parameters typically time or frequency m Paired cursors measure both vertical parameters
58. You can read about Sample and the other acquisition modes in Acquisition Modes beginning on page 3 5 Envelope and Average acquisition modes disable Roll mode You can read about Roll mode beginning on page 3 93 Bandwidth refers to the range of frequencies that an oscilloscope can acquire and display accurately that is with less than 3 dB attenuation You can set different bandwidths with the digitizing oscilloscope Lower bandwidth settings let you eliminate the higher frequency components of a signal The TDS 400A offers Full 100 MHz and 20 MHz bandwidth settings You can couple your input signal to the digitizing oscilloscope three ways You can choose between AC DC or Ground GND You also can set the input impedance The following selections are available m DC coupling shows both the AC and DC components of an input signal m AC coupling shows only the alternating components of an input signal m Ground GND coupling disconnects the input signal from the acquisition m Input impedance lets you select either 1 MQ or 50 Q impedance NOTE If you select 50 Q impedance with AC coupling the digitizing oscillo scope will not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz For more acquisition information see Scaling and Positioning Waveforms on page 2 43 and Acquisition Modes on page 3 5 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Scaling and Positioning Waveforms To Check Position TDS 400A Di
59. active probe to the oscilloscope such as the P6205 the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 2 If you then connect a passive probe like the P6138 you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ Bandwidth refers to the range of frequencies that an oscilloscope can acquire and display accurately that is with less than 3 dB attenuation To select the upper TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Vertical Control limit for the higher frequency components change the bandwidth of the selected channel Press VERTICAL MENU gt Bandwidth main gt Full 100 MHz or 20 MHz side Fine Scale To make fine adjustments to the vertical scale press VERTICAL MENU gt Fine Scale main and use the general purpose knob to adjust the vertical scale Position To adjust the vertical position to a specific number of divisions press VERTICAL MENU gt Position main and use the general purpose knob to set vertical position If you want to reset the reference point of the selected waveform to the center of the display press Set to 0 divs side Offset Offset lets you subtract DC bias from the waveform so the oscilloscope can acquire the exact part of the waveform you are interested in For example you might be trying to look at a small ripple on a power supply output It may be a 100 mV ripple on top of a 15 V supply Using offset you can display the ripple and scale it to meet your needs To use offs
60. are provided as follows m NTSC which provides a default line rate compatible with the NTSC standard 525 60 m PAL which provides a default line rate compatible with the PAL standard 625 50 m SECAM which provides a default line rate compatible with the SECAM standard 625 50 m Custom which provides user selectable line rate ranges see Custom Line Rate Ranges below Custom Line Rate Ranges 15 kHz 20 kHz 20 kHz 25 kHz 25 kHz 35 kHz and 35 kHz 64 kHz Holdoff Automatically adjusts to 58 ms nominal for NTSC class to 150 ms nominal for PAL and SECAM Triggerable on Field Selections Odd Even or Both Delayed Acquisition S ettable for delay by line number or runs after time delay Frequency Maximum for Events Delay 90 MHz TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 19 Appendix B Specification Table B 17 Typical Characteristics Triggering System Cont Name Description Width Minimum Pulse and Rearm Events 5ns Delay 1 The trigger position errors are typically less than the values given here These values are for triggering signals having a slew rate at the trigger point of 0 5 division ns 2 The waveform interval WI is the time between the samples in the waveform record Also see the footnote for the characteristics Sample Rate Range and Equivalent Time or Interpolated Waveform Rates in Table B 3 on page B 5 3 The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trig
61. caused by changes in ambient temperature and component aging This allows you to make accurate measurements over a wide ambient temperature range You should run an SPC anytime you wish to ensure that the measurements you make are made with the most accuracy possible You should also run an SPC if the temperature has changed more than 5 C since the last SPC was performed Also run SPC before performing the Performance Verification and the Adjust ment Procedures NOTE When making measurements at volts division settings less than or equal to 5 mV you must run SPC at least once per week Failure to do so may result in the oscilloscope not meeting warranted performance levels at those volts div settings Warranted characteristics are listed in Appendix B Compensate the Signal Path To run an SPC do the following steps 1 Power on the digitizing oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 2 Disconnect any input signals you may have connected from all input channels STOP When doing steps 3 and 4 do not turn off the oscilloscope until signal path compensation completes If you interrupt or lose power to the instrument while signal path compensation is running a message is stored in the oscillo scope error log If such a case occurs rerun signal path compensation The error message remains in the error log until cleared using special service software 3 Press SHIFT UTILITY gt System
62. correlated noise sources in the test environment Resolution Internal Clock time div 3 Resolutiongps 8 lt 8 0 5 Log 300 107 lt 15 bits Bandwidth Internal Clock For lus div and slower BW pires 0 44 sa Hz Resolution External Clock lt 15 bits 100 000 000 Resolutiony rs 8 lt s 0 5 Loe rape iam Bandwidth External Clock BWrire 44 Clock vternalbtens Hz TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 7 Acquisition Modes Envelope Mode wth Average Mode 3 8 Table 3 1 Resolution Bits Time Base Speed Bits of Resolution Bandwidth 1 us and faster 8 bits gt 22 MHz 2 us to 5 us 9 bits gt 4 4 MHz 10 us to 20 us 10 bits gt 1 1 MHz 50 us to 100 us 11 bits 220 MHz 200 us to 500 us 12 bits gt 44 KHz Envelope mode lets you acquire and display a waveform record that shows the extremes in variation over several acquisitions You specify the number of acquisitions over which to accumulate the data The oscilloscope saves the highest and lowest values in two adjacent intervals similar to the Peak Detect mode But Envelope mode unlike Peak Detect gathers peaks over many trigger events After each trigger event the oscilloscope acquires data and then compares the min max values from the current acquisition with those stored from previous acquisitions The final display shows the most extreme values for all the acquisit
63. described on page 3 79 and connect the termination to the pin in one of the KlipChip shoulders m For both ground and signal attachment combine two KlipChips with a dual lead adapter or use a single lead adapter and a long ground lead Optional Probe Accessories Low Inductance Spring Tips Probe Tip to Chassis Adapter Optional probe accessories that you can order include the following Use low inductance spring tips whenever you are measuring devices with fixed spacings The spring tip is ideal for repetitive production use Select different length springs to match device spacings on a variety of components Because the spring tip ground lead simply contacts the ground reference instead of clipping onto it you can move the probe around your device under test with ease W The probe tip to chassis adapter makes your test point accessible without removing instrument covers or panels It provides an easy access low induc tance test point anywhere on your circuit The probe tip to chassis adapter has the same low inductance properties as the probe tip to circuit board adapter described previously To use your probe with these adapters unscrew and remove the ribbed ferrule TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 77 Probe Accessories 3 78 Compact to Miniature Probe Tip Adapter IC Protector Tip a yee 15 7 or The compact to miniature probe tip adapter allows you to use accessories that are de
64. displayed see Figure 3 32 You can display a snapshot on any channel or ref memory but only one snapshot can be displayed at a time N Tek Run 100KS7s Sample Snapshot Again 0 i snapshot on Period 1 000ms Freq 1 00008KH2 E Width 500ps Width 500ys Snapshot Display 7 gt Erstwd 4 020ms Rise SMS Fall 2 BUS 0 E Duty 50 0 Duty 50 0 0ver i14 Over 1 4 E High 568mV Low SmvV Max 576mV Min 0V Ampl 560mW Pk Pk 576mWV Mean 287 2m cycMean 288 0m RMS 401 2mv CycRMS 401 6m ny 0 i Area 1 433532mVs cycArea 288 034uVs elec 7 igh Low Meastmnt measrmnt Corr petu p Teve snapshot olololololo lo Figure 3 32 Snapshot Menu and Readout To use snapshot obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured pressing AUTOSET may help Then do the following steps 1 Press MEASURE gt SNAPSHOT main 2 Press either SNAPSHOT main or AGAIN side to take another snapshot 3 68 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Measuring Waveforms NOTE The snapshot display tells you the channel that the snapshot is being made on 3 Push Remove Measrmnt Consider the following rules when taking a snapshot For More Information Be sure to display the waveform properly before taking a snapshot Snapshot does not warn you if a wavefor
65. electrical characteristics Generally each instrument represents one device load on the bus m Do not exceed 20 meters about 65 feet total cumulative cable length m Turn on at least two thirds of the device loads present when you use your network m Include only one cable path between devices on your network see Fig ure 3 40 Do not create loop configurations TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 89 Remote Communication GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device Figure 3 40 Typical GPIB Network Configuration Use the Proper To connect the digitizing oscilloscope to a GPIB network use an IEEE Std Interconnect Cables 488 1 1987 GPIB cable available from Tektronix part number 012 0991 00 The standard GPIB cable connects to a 24 pin GPIB connector located on the oscilloscope rear panel The connector has a D type shell and conforms to IEEE Std 488 1 1987 You can stack GPIB connectors on top of each other see Figure 3 41 Figure 3 41 Stacking GPIB Connectors 3 90 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Remote Communication To Set Up for Remote To set up remote communications be sure your setup meets the GPIB protocol Operation and interface requirements just described Then do the following procedures Connect the Oscilloscope to the GPIB To connect the oscilloscope plug an IEEE
66. gt Recall Setup 1 Recall Setup 2 side To recall a setup stored on disk press From File Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Only files with ser extensions will be displayed Finally press the side menu Recall From Selected File to complete the operation Recalling a setup does not change the menu that is currently displayed If you recall a setup that is labeled factory in the side menu you recall the factory setup The conventional method for recalling the factory setup is described below To Recall the Factory Setup 3 98 To reset your oscilloscope to the factory defaults Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side See Factory Initialization Settings on page E 1 for a list of the factory defaults TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Saving and Recalling Setups To Delete All Setups and Waveforms Tek Secure Sometimes you might use the digitizing oscilloscope to acquire waveforms that are confidential Furthermore before returning the oscilloscope to general usage you might want to remove all such waveforms and any setups used to acquire them Be sure you want to remove all waveforms and setups because once they are removed you cannot retrieve them To use Tek Secure to remove all stored setups and waveforms does not affect mass storage disk Press SHIFT UTILITY System main gt Config
67. hardcopy device see Fig ure 3 21 Use the GPIB port to remotely request and receive a hardcopy from the digitizing oscilloscope Use the RS 232 or a Centronics port on the controller to print output Digitizing Oscilloscope Hardcopy Device PC Compatible Centronics or GPIB Cable RS 232 Cable Figure 3 21 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a PC Print If your controller is PC compatible and it uses the Tektronix GURU or S3FG210 National Instruments GPIB PCII IIA GPIB package do the following steps to print a hardcopy 1 Use the MS DOS cd command to move to the directory that holds the software that came with your GPIB board For example if you installed the software in the GPIB PC directory type cd GPIB PC 2 Run the IBIC program that came with your GPIB board Type IBIC TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 41 Hardcopy 3 42 3 Type IBFIND DEV1 where DEV 1 is the name for the digitizing oscilloscope you defined using the IBCONF EXE program that came with the GPIB board NOTE If you defined another name use it instead of DEV1 Also remember that the device address of the digitizing oscilloscope as set with the IB CONF EXE program should match the address set in the digitizing oscilloscope Utility menu typically use 1 Making hardcopies using some hardcopy formats may generate a time out
68. in a negative direction the waveform data must fall below 10 of the amplitude from the MidRef point before the measurement system is armed and ready for a positive crossing Similarly after a positive MidRef crossing waveform data must go above 10 of the amplitude before a negative crossing can be measured Hysteresis is useful when you are measuring noisy signals because it allows the digitizing oscillo scope to ignore minor fluctuations in the signal MCross Calculations MCross1 MCross2 and MCross3 refer to the first second and third MidRef cross times respectively See Figure C 1 The polarity of the crossings does not matter for these variables but the crossings alternate in polarity that is MCross1 could be a positive or negative crossing but if MCross is a positive crossing MCross2 is a negative crossing The oscilloscope calculates these values as follows 1 Find the first MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region This is MCross1 2 Continuing from MCross1 find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region of the opposite polarity of MCross1 This is MCross2 3 Continuing from MCross2 find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region of the same polarity as MCross1 This is MCross3 MCross1Polarity is the polarity of first crossing no default It can be rising or falling TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 3 Appendix C
69. information is not Long ground leads are ideal for quick troubleshooting when you are looking for the presence or absence of a signal and are not concerned with the precision of the measurement Because of the high inductance associated with long ground leads you should not use them for precise measurements above approximately 30 MHz or for pulses with rise times less than about 11 ns TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Accessories You can choose between a ground lead terminated with an alligator clip and a lead terminated with a square pin receptacle Low Inductance Ground Low inductance ground leads reduce ground lead inductance Compared to a Lead typical six inch ground lead with an inductance of approximately 140 nH the low inductance tip assembly has an inductance of approximately 32 nH That means that your measurements are relatively free of probe related high frequency degradation up to approximately 250 MHz The low inductance tip has a partially insulated flexible ground pin that allows you to ground the probe and still have a limited amount of reach with the probe tip Because the ground lead simply contacts the ground reference instead of clipping onto it you can move the probe around your device under test with ease The assembly is well suited to densely populated circuit boards and multi pin connectors TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 75 Probe Accessories Probe Tip to
70. main gt Cal pop up gt Signal Path main gt OK Compensate Signal Paths side D 4 Wait for signal path compensation to complete one to three minutes While it progresses a clock icon shown at left is displayed on screen When compensation completes the status message is updated to Pass or Fail in the main menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 113 Signal Path Compensation 5 Verify the word Pass appears under Signal Path in the main menu See Figure 3 52 Tek Run 100KS s Sample Signal Path ompensatio Minnie Signal Path Compensation SPC corrects for DC inaccuracies caused by ambient temperature variations and or long term drift SPC can be run at any time after Che instrument is and should be run whenever the instrument s ambient temperature has changed by more than 5 C contig y input signals OK ih Ac components Disconnect or otherwise BENE remove these signals prior to running SPC Compensate Diag E Signal Paths ignal oltage ow Freq High Freq rigger System Path Reference Response Response Skew lt Cal gt Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass OS ololololololo Figure 3 52 Performing a Signal Path Compensation 3 114 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Sy SP ee Taking Cursor Measurements Description Cursor Types Horizontal Bar Cur
71. max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the minimum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found below the mid point See Appendix C Algorithms for details Main menu A group of related controls for a major oscilloscope function that the oscilloscope displays across the bottom of the screen Main menu buttons Bezel buttons under the main menu display They allow you to select items in the main menu F Maximum Amplitude voltage measurement of the maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage oe Mean Amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform U Minimum Amplitude voltage measurement of the minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Negative duty cycle A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative overshoot measurement Amplitude voltage measurement NegativeOvershoot Amplinide Negative width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points falling edge MidRef default 50 and rising edge MidRef default 50 on a negative pulse Normal trigger mode A mode in which the oscilloscope does not a
72. on To bring up the Edge Trigger menu and select which source you want for the trigger on the TDS 420A and TDS 460A press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 AC Line or Auxiliary side On the TDS 410A press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 AC Line or Auxiliary side and then press SET LEVEL TO 50 Set all other oscilloscope controls the horizontal SCALE has no effect except in ZOOM as you would for an internally clocked acquisition TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Horizontal Control For More Information See Scaling and Positioning Waveforms on page 2 43 See Delayed Triggering on page 3 13 See Zoom on page 3 135 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 51 Horizontal Control 3 52 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A Limit Testing Limit testing provides a way to automatically compare each incoming or math waveform against a template waveform You set an envelope of limits around a waveform and let the digitizing oscilloscope find waveforms that fall outside those limits see Figure 3 25 When it finds such a waveform the digitizing oscilloscope can generate a hardcopy ring a bell stop and wait for your input or any combination of these actions This section describes how to use limit testing Figure 3 25 Comp
73. points That is it uses either the linear or sin x x interpolation algorithm See Acquisition on page 2 39 for details about sampling To choose the event that signals the oscilloscope to stop acquiring waveforms do the following step Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Stop After main gt RUN STOP button only Single Acquisition Sequence or Limit Test Condition Met side see Figure 3 4 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Acquisition Modes Tek Run 100KS s Sample Stop After RUN STOP button only Single J Acquisition Sequence Limit Test Condition Met Toomv TO M 500s Chit g6mV Mode Repetitive Stop Limit Test Limit Test create Signal Limit Test Sample N A S button Setup Sources Template Ololololololo Oloo oj Figure 3 4 Acquire Menu Stop After RUN STOP button only side lets you start or stop acquisitions by toggling the RUN STOP button Pressing the RUN STOP button once stops the acquisitions The upper left hand corner in the display indicates Stopped and shows the number of acquisitions If you press the button again the digitizing oscilloscope resumes taking acquisitions Single Acquisition Sequence side lets you run a single sequence of acquisitions by pressing the RUN STOP button In Sample Peak Detect or Hi Res mode the oscilloscope acq
74. pop up gt Tek Secure Erase Memory main gt OK Erase Setup amp Ref Memory side Executing Tek Secure accomplishes the following tasks m Replaces all waveforms in reference memories with zero sample values m Replaces the current front panel setup and all setups stored in setup memory with the factory setup m Calculates the checksums of all waveform memory and setup memory locations to verify successful completion of setup and waveform erasure m If the checksum calculation is unsuccessful displays a warning message if the checksum calculation is successful displays a confirmation message To Run the File Utilities To run file utilities see the File System article on page 3 31 For More Information See Example 4 Saving Setups on page 2 29 See Factory Initialization Settings on page E 1 See File System on page 3 31 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 99 Saving and Recalling Setups 3 100 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual SSE ae Saving and Recalling Waveforms To Save a Waveform You can store a waveform in any of the four internal reference memories of the digitizing oscilloscope The waveforms are retained even when you turn the oscilloscope off or unplug it The oscilloscope can also save waveforms to floppy disk This section describes how to save delete and display reference waveforms NOTE With Option IM and 2A there are only 120K points available for reference
75. roll mode 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Controls main and set Roll Mode side to Automatic to enable roll mode 2 Setthe Horizontal SCALE to 50 ms per division or slower NOTE Envelope Average acquisition modes or any of the persistence modes display modes inhibit roll mode You also inhibit roll mode if you set the horizontal Clock menu to External and the maximum external sample rate greater than 1 kc per second 3 If you want an untriggered roll mode press TRIGGER MENU gt Mode main gt Auto side If you want a triggered roll mode press TRIGGER MENU Mode main gt Normal side See Figure 3 45 4 If you want a single sequence roll mode press SHIFT gt ACQ MENU gt Stop After main gt Single Sequence side To Turn Off Acquisitions Do the following step to stop acquisitions in roll mode If you are not in Single Sequence you must press RUN STOP to stop roll mode If you are in Single Sequence roll mode acquisitions stop automatically when a complete record is acquired TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 95 Roll Mode To Turn Off Roll Mode Do the following steps to turn off roll mode NOTE Envelope Average acquisition modes or any of the persistence modes display modes also turns off roll mode You also turn off roll mode if you set the horizontal Clock menu to External and the maximum external sample rate greater than 1 kc per second 1 Set
76. starts acquiring and displaying a waveform They help create meaningful waveforms from unstable jumbles or blank screens see Figure 2 19 The digitizing oscilloscope has two types of triggers edge and with option 5 video Triggered Waveform Untriggered Waveforms Figure 2 19 Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays The Trigger Event The trigger event establishes the time zero point in the waveform record and all points in the record are located in time with respect to that point The digitizing oscilloscope continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the pretrigger portion of the waveform record that part of the waveform that is displayed before or to the left of the triggering event on screen When a trigger event occurs the digitizing oscilloscope starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger portion the waveform record displayed after or to the right of the trigger event Once a trigger is recognized the digitizing oscillo scope does not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete Trigger Sources You can derive your trigger from various sources Input channels are the most commonly used trigger source The channel you select as a trigger source functions whether it is displayed or not AC Line is the trigger source most often used when you are looking at signals
77. the approximate resonant frequency fo at which that parasitic circuit resonates he 2n x JLC TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 71 Probe Accessories Reducing the ground lead inductance raises the resonant frequency Ideally the inductance is low enough that the resulting frequency is above the frequency at which you want to take measurements For that purpose the probes include several accessories to help reduce ground lead inductance 4 Ground Lead Low inductance Ground Lead Figure 3 34 Signal Variation Introduced by Probe Ground Lead 1 ns division Standard Probe Accessories The following descriptions explain how to use many of the accessories that came with your probe Figure 3 35 shows both standard and optional probe accesso ries and how they attach to your probe These accessories either reduce ground lead inductance or make it physically easier to probe different kinds of circuits Standard probe accessories include the following items 3 72 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Accessories Marker Ring Standard D Marker Ring Standard 6 Compact to Miniature Probe Tip Adapter a Optional Dg IC Protector Ti ne 5 ed rotector Tip Optional p Probe Tip to Circuit P rs j lt Board Adapter ae x Standard Dual Lead Adapter ay i DR Optional AS PRS 5 Pa ee oS gt ES ee i Probe Tip to Chassi
78. the hardcopy in process message is removed from the screen TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 39 Hardcopy To Save to a Floppy Disk 3 40 You can add hardcopies to the spool until it is full When the spool is filled by adding a hardcopy the message Hardcopy in Process Press HARDCOPY to abort remains displayed You can abort the last hardcopy sent by pressing the button while the message is still displayed When the printer empties enough of the spool to finish adding the last hardcopy it does so and then removes the message Clear the Spool To remove all hardcopies from the spool press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Clear Spool main gt OK Confirm Clear Spool side The oscilloscope takes advantage of any unused RAM when spooling hardcopies to printers The size of the spool is therefore variable The number of hardco pies that can be spooled depends on three variables m The amount of unused RAM m The hardcopy format chosen m The complexity of the display To send hardcopies to a floppy disk do the following steps 1 Set up the digitizing oscilloscope communication and hardware parameters as outlined in Jo Set Up for Making Hardcopies on page 3 36 2 Insert a formatted 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk into the slot at the top of the digitizing oscilloscope NOTE To format disks delete hardcopy files you save to disk and otherwise manage the disk storage see File System on pa
79. the signal period expressed as a percentage PositiveWidth Period 2007 PositiveDutyCycle 3 60 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Measuring Waveforms Table 3 3 Measurement Definitions Cont Definition Positive Overshoot Voltage measurement over the entire waveform or gated region PositiveOvershoot Ma udn x 100 Amplitude F Positive Width Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidR ef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse Rise time Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value default 10 to a High Ref value default 90 of its final value yy RMS Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated region Measurement Readouts With no menus displayed the measurement readouts appear at the right of the display see Figure 3 27 When menus are displayed the readouts appear in the graticule area You can display and continuously update as many as four measurements at any one time Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample Measurement Readout Area sve eer Fre tome ook BEE eee ene EEE els eee f E 50 4 Y h1 Period 1 010ms chi width 500ms chi Over 3 3 a Ep Cat Foamy
80. then specify that the comparison is to be made and the channel to compare against the template using the Limit Test Sources main menu item See Limit Testing on page 3 53 For More Information See Acquisition on page 2 39 See Limit Testing on page 3 53 3 12 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A Delayed Triggering The TDS 400A Series oscilloscopes provide a main time base and a delayed time base The delayed time base like the main time base requires a trigger signal and an input source dedicated to that signal You can only use delay with the edge trigger This section describes how to delay the acquisition of waveforms There are two different ways to delay the acquisition of waveforms delayed runs after main and delayed triggerable Only delayed triggerable uses the delayed trigger system Delayed runs after main looks for a main trigger then waits a user defined time and then starts acquiring see Figure 3 5 Wait for Wait User specified Acquire Mall Time Data Trigger Figure 3 5 Delayed Runs After Main Delayed triggerable looks for a main trigger and then depending on the type of delayed trigger selected makes one of the types of delayed triggerable mode acquisitions listed below see Figure 3 6 Wait f Wait User specified Time ii ar Number of Delayed Wait for Delay Acquire an Trigger Events or Number Trigger Event Data Trigger of External Clocks Figure 3 6 Delayed Triggerable After Tim
81. time the oscilloscope waits depends on the time base setting m In Normal mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform only if there is a valid trigger 2 To change the holdoff time press Holdoff side Enter the value in using the general purpose knob TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 29 Edge Triggering For More Information 3 30 If you want to enter a large number using the general purpose knob press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light next to the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly Holdoff is settable from 0 minimum holdoff available to 100 maximum available See Holdoff Variable Main Trigger on page B 19 of Appendix B for the typical minimum and maximum values For typical values see the help text for Trigger Holdoff Holdoff is automatically reset to 0 when you change the main time base time division setting However it is not reset if you change the delayed time base time division that is when the time base setting in the Horizontal menu is Intensified or Delayed Only See Triggering on page 2 31 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual File System With the Option IF File System the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes provide file utilities and a floppy disk drive for saving hardcopies setups and wave forms This section describes how to manage delete rename
82. to 100 or to a voltage level MidRef the waveform middle reference level Typically set to 50 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level LowRef the waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calculations Typically set to 10 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level Mid2Ref the middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in delay time calculations Typically set to 50 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level The oscilloscope also measures several values itself that it uses to help calculate measurements TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms RecordLength is the number of data points in the time base You set it with the Horizontal menu Record Length item Start is the location of the start of the measurement zone X value It is 0 0 samples unless you are making a gated measurement When you use gated measurements it is the location of the left vertical cursor End is the location of the end of the measurement zone X value It is RecordLength 1 0 samples unless you are making a gated measurement When you use gated measurements it is the location of the right vertical cursor Hysteresis The hysteresis band is 10 of the waveform amplitude It is used in MCross1 MCross2 and MCross3 calculations For example once a crossing has been measured
83. to use edge triggering how to select the edge source coupling slope and level It also explains how to select the trigger mode auto or normal for all trigger types To Check Edge Trigger Status To quickly check if edge triggers are selected check the Trigger readout When edge triggers are selected the trigger readout displays the trigger source as well as the trigger slope and level see Figure 3 13 Main Trigger Main Trigger Source Ch 1 Slope Rising Edge Main Trigger Level Main Time Base Time Div Main Time Base Toomv M 5004us Chi ov Slope T OS SS ode Source amp chi Holdoff Coupling DE TYPE Edge gt Figure 3 13 Edge Trigger Readouts To Select Edge Triggering Use the Edge Trigger menu to select edge triggering and to perform the procedures for selecting the source coupling slope trigger level mode and holdoff that follow To bring up the Edge Trigger menu press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up see Figure 3 14 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 27 Edge Triggering 3 28 To Select a Source To Specify Coupling DC ACM To select which source you want for the trigger On TDS 420A and TDS 460A press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 AC Line or Auxiliary side On TDS 410A press TRIG
84. typically volts and horizontal parameters typically time or frequency There are also two modes for cursor operation available in the cursor menu independent and tracking see Figure 2 32 m Independent mode cursors operate as was earlier described that is you move one cursor at a time the active cursor using the general purpose knob and you press the SELECT button to toggle which cursor bar is active m Tracking mode cursors operate in tandem you move both cursors at the same time using the general purpose knob To adjust the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor press the SELECT button to suspend cursor tracking and use the general purpose knob to make the adjustment A second push toggles the cursors back to tracking You can read more detailed information about how to use cursors in Taking Cursor Measurements beginning on page 3 115 2 48 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Independent Mode Tracking Mode r Only Selected Cursor Moves gt Both Cursors Move in Tandem Figure 2 32 Cursor Modes Taking Graticule The oscilloscope provides a graticule for measuring the difference either in time Measurements or amplitude between two points on a waveform record Graticule measure ments provide you with quick visual estimates For example you might look at a waveform amplitude and say It is a little more than 100 mV Measure Waveform Amplitude To measure the amplitude
85. voltage probes see Figure 3 38 have attenuation factors in the 100X to 1000X range The considerations that apply to other passive probes apply to high voltage probes with a few exceptions Since the voltage range on high voltage probes varies from 1 kV to 20 kV DC peak AC the probe head design is mechanically much larger than for a passive probe High voltage probes have the added advantage of lower input capacitance typically 2 3 pF Figure 3 38 Typical High Voltage Probes Active voltage probes sometimes called FET probes use active circuit elements such as transistors There are three classes of active probes m High speed active m Differential active m Fixtured active Active voltage measuring probes use active circuit elements in the probe design to process signals from the circuit under test All active probes require a source TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Selection of power for their operation Power is obtained either from an external power supply or from the oscilloscope itself NOTE When you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope such as the P6205 the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a passive probe like the P6138 you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ Vertical Control on page 3 121 explains how to change the input impedance High Speed Active Probes Active probes offer low input capacitance 1 to 2 pF
86. wares twee ne 3 131 ZOOM ua Se SES oe BES Brad A Baer 3 135 Appendix A Options and Accessories 0 0 c cece eee ceceees A 1 Appendix B Specification 2ccceceeesseoseneensnenn nun B 1 Appendix C Algorithms 0 ccc cece cece cece cece nen une C 1 Appendix D Packaging for Shipment cseceeeees D 1 Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings 000 E 1 Appendix F Remote Display cccccccccccsscsccecs F 1 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up 1 4 Figure 1 2 ON STBY Button cc ccc cece e cece eceees 1 5 Figure 2 1 Connecting a Probe for the Examples 2 13 Figure 2 2 SETUP Button Location eee ee eee eee 2 14 Figure 2 3 The Displayed Setup Menu cceceeeeees 2 14 Figure 24 SET LEVEL TO 50 Button 0c eee 2 15 Figure 2 5 The Display After Factory Initialization 2 16 Figure 2 6 The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls 2 17 Figure 2 7 TRIGGER Controls 0 cece cece cece wees 2 18 Figure 2 8 AUTOSET Button Location 0c cece eee 2 18 Figure 2 9 The Display After Pressing Autoset 2 19 Figure 2 10 Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation 2 19 Figure 2 11 The Channel Buttons and Lights 2 20 Figure 2 12 The Verti
87. waveforms If you select the 120K record length in the Horizontal menu then you can only save one reference waveform Also you can only use display four waveforms Even if you do not display the source waveforms Dual waveform math uses three of the four waveforms For example if you display a math waveform that is the sum of CH 1 and CH 2 even if CH 1 and CH 2 are not displayed you have used three waveforms Therefore you can only display one additional waveform The digitizing oscilloscope can display up to 11 waveforms 9 on the TDS 410 at one time That includes waveforms from the input channels four reference waveforms and three math waveforms You can save any combination of different size waveform records as long as the total is less than the capacity of nonvolatile waveform memory Saving waveforms is useful when working with many waveforms and channels If you have more waveforms than you can display you can save one of the waveforms and then stop acquiring it Use this method to display another waveform without loosing the first one To save a waveform do the following steps 1 Select the channel that has the waveform you want to save NOTE Before doing step 2 that follows note that if you use a reference memory location labeled active see Figure 3 47 you overwrite the waveform that was previously stored there You can store waveforms in reference locations labeled empty without disturbing previously stored wave
88. 0 In order to represent a signal accurately and avoid aliasing you must sample the signal more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component For example a signal with frequency components of 400 MHz would need to be sampled at a rate faster than 800 Megasamples second Actual High Frequency Waveform _ gt Apparent Low Frequency Waveform Due to Aliasing Sampled Points Figure 2 30 Aliasing One simple way to check for aliasing is to slowly change the horizontal scale time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically you may have aliasing There are various ways to prevent aliasing Try adjusting the horizontal scale or simply press the AUTOSET button You can also counteract some aliasing by changing the acquisition mode in the Acquisition menu For example if you are using the sample mode and suspect aliasing you may want to change to the peak detect mode Since the peak detect mode searches for samples with the highest and lowest values it can detect faster signal components over time Delayed Time Base You can set a main time base and a delayed time base Each time base has its own trigger There are two types of delayed time base acquisi tions with each based on its triggering relationship to the main time base These are delayed runs after main and delay triggerable after time events or both acquisitions TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2
89. 00us Main Diyd 50KS 50 S00 10 divs 50 0 Runs After 0ns zoom Status vert Horiz OFF 2 0 2 0 Lock DZ Offset All OFF 5 00MS Mode Repet Sample On Stop R S button OFF Bell Chi ch2 ch3 ch4 OFF Refi None None Mone Hi low Measure Refs Hi Ref OFF Histogram Status Snapshot System Display Trigger 90 5 Mid Ref Low Ref Mid2 Ref 0 10 30 Waveforms Oo Status Banner Keil Co CO Figure 3 9 Status Menu System TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual CIO O O 3 19 Determining Status To Display the Banner To display the banner firmware version options and copyright Press SHIFT STATUS Banner main See Figure 3 10 Tek Run 100KS7s Sample Tektronix 7 TDS 420A Digitizing Oscilloscope Version FV MFG0 6 Ae Options 05 13 1F 2F c Copyright Tektronix Inc 1991 1995 All rights reserved oOlololo o olelolelololo Figure 3 10 Banner Display 3 20 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual a eee Display Modes The digitizing oscilloscope can display waveform records in different ways The Display menu lets you adjust the oscilloscope display style intensity level graticule and format This section describes how to adjust the oscilloscope display sty
90. 0A Digitizing Oscilloscopes and all factory installed options comply with the RF Interference Suppression requirements of Postal Regulation Vfg 243 1991 amended per Vfg 46 1992 The German Postal Service was notified that the equipment is being marketed The German Postal Service has the right to re test the series and to verify that it complies TEKTRONIX Bescheinigung des Herstellers Importeurs Hiermit wird bescheinigt da das TDS 410A TDS 420A and TDS 460A Digitizing Oscilloscopes und alle fabrikinstallierten Optionen in bereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der Amtsblatt Verf gung Vfg 243 1991 und Zusatzverf gung 46 1992 funkentst rt sind Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Ger tes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur berpr fung der Serie auf Einhalten der Bestimmungen einger umt TEKTRONIX NOTICE to the user operator The German Postal Service requires that systems assembled by the operator user of this instrument must also comply with Postal Regulation Vfg 243 1991 Par 2 Sect 1 HINWEIS f r den Benutzer Betreiber Die vom Betreiber zusammengestellte Anlage innerhalb derer dieses Ger t eingesetzt wird mu ebenfalls den Voraussetzungen nach Par 2 Ziff 1 der Vfg 243 1991 gen gen NOTICE to the user operator The German Postal Service requires that this equipment when used in a test setup may only be operated if the requirements of Postal Regulation Vfg 243 1991 Par 2
91. 0A User Manual 3 15 Delayed Triggering 3 16 To Trigger After Delay To select Delayed Triggerable mode do the following steps 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Time Base main gt Delayed Only side gt Delayed Triggerable side By pressing Intensified side you can display an intensified zone that shows where the delayed timebase record may occur a valid delay trigger event must be received relative to the main trigger on the main timebase For Delayed Triggerable After mode the start of the intensified zone corresponds to the possible start point of the delayed timebase record The end of the zone continues to the end of main timebase since a delayed time base record may be triggered at any point after the delay time elapses To learn how to define the intensity level of the normal and intensified waveform see Display Modes on page 3 21 Now you need to bring up the Delayed Trigger menu so you can define the delayed trigger event Press SHIFT DELAYED TRIG gt Delay by main gt Triggerable After Time Events or Ext clks side Figure 3 8 Enter the delay time or events using the general purpose knob Hint You can go directly to the Delayed Trigger menu see step 2 By selecting either Triggerable After Time or Events the oscilloscope automati cally switches to Delayed Triggerable in the Horizontal menu If you wish to leave Delayed Triggerable you still need to display the Horizontal menu The Source m
92. 1 00 IC Protector Tip Package of 10 015 0201 07 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Table A 5 Probe Accessories Cont Part Number 015 0201 08 016 0633 00 Accessory IC Protector Tip Package of 100 Marker Ring Set Two each of nine colors SMT KlipChip 20 Adapters SMG50 Low Inductance Spring Tips Two each of five different 016 1077 00 springs and insulator Probe Tip to Chassis Adapter 131 4210 00 NOTE The next four items can only be used with the Compact to Miniature Probe Tip Adapter Dual Lead Adapter 015 0325 00 BNC to P robe Tip Adapter 013 0084 01 G R to Probe Tip Adapter 50 Q 017 0088 00 Bayonet Ground Assembly 013 0085 00 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A 7 Appendix A Options and Accessories A 8 Accessory Software Warranty Information Service Assurance Table A 6 lists optional accessories that are Tektronix software products recommended for use with your digitizing oscilloscope Table A 6 Accessory Software Software Part Number EZ Test Program Generator S45F 030 Wavewriter AWG and waveform creation S3FT400 LabWindows 063 0169 XX Check for the full warranty statements for this product the probes and the products listed above after the title page of each product manual Tektronix offers the following services that you can purchase any time during the warranty period of this product m REP
93. 1 button the digitizing oscilloscope displays a graph of the channel 1 voltage levels on the X axis against the channel 2 voltage levels on the Y axis This occurs whether or not you are displaying the channel 2 waveform in YT format If you later press the WAVEFORM OFF button for either channel 1 or 2 the digitizing oscilloscope deletes the XY graph of channel 1 versus channel 2 Since selecting YT or XY affects only the display the horizontal and vertical scale and position knobs and menus control the same parameters regardless of the mode selected Specifically in XY mode the horizontal scale continues to control the time base and the horizontal position continues to control which portion of the waveforms are displayed XY format is a dot only display although it can have persistence The Vector style selection has no effect when you select XY format You cannot display Math waveforms in XY format They disappear from the display when you select XY For More Information See Acquisition on page 2 39 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 25 Display Modes 3 26 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Sn SS Edge Triggering This oscilloscope can trigger on the edge of a waveform An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope You will likely use edge triggering for most of your measurements This section describes how
94. 136 Horizontal Units Cursor menu 3 119 HPGL 3 35 HPGL Hardcopy menu 3 36 T O Status menu 3 19 V O Utility menu 3 36 3 91 IC protector tip 3 78 Icons 1 1 Independent Mode Cursor 2 48 Independent Cursor menu 3 118 Infinite Persistence Display menu 3 22 Installation 1 3 Intensified Samples Display menu 3 22 Intensified Horizontal menu 3 14 3 16 Intensity 3 22 Glossary 5 Intensity Display menu 3 22 3 26 Interlaced Field One Video Trigger menu 3 128 Interlaced Field Two Video Trigger menu 3 128 Interleaf 3 35 Interleaf Hardcopy menu 3 36 Internal Clock Horizontal menu 3 49 Interpolation 2 40 3 23 Glossary 5 IRE NTSC Cursor menu 3 120 K Knob Glossary 5 General purpose 2 7 2 25 2 27 Glossary4 Horizontal POSITION 2 17 2 44 3 46 Horizontal SCALE 2 17 2 44 3 46 MEASURE 2 47 Trigger MAIN LEVEL 2 18 2 35 Vertical POSITION 2 17 2 44 3 121 Vertical SCALE 2 17 2 44 3 121 L Labelling menu Enter Char 3 32 3 34 Landscape Hardcopy menu 3 37 Index 5 Index Laserjet 3 35 Laserjet Hardcopy menu 3 36 Layout Hardcopy menu 3 37 Level Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Level Main Trigger menu 3 29 Level Trigger 2 34 LF Rej Main Trigger menu 3 28 Limit Test Condition Met Acquire menu 3 56 Limit Test Setup Acquire menu 3 56 Limit Test Sources Acquire menu 3 55 Limit Test Acquire menu 3 56 Limit testing 3 53 3 58 Linear interpolation
95. 2 40 3 23 Glossary 5 Linear interpolation Display menu 3 23 Long ground leads 3 74 Low 3 60 Glossary 5 Low frequency rejection 2 34 Low impedance Zo probes 3 83 Low Ref Measure menu 3 65 Low inductance ground lead 3 75 Low inductance spring tips 3 77 A 7 Main menu Glossary 5 Main menu buttons 2 3 Glossary 5 Main Scale Horizontal menu 3 48 Main Trigger Menu Falling edge 3 29 Rising edge 3 29 Main Trigger menu 2 38 3 27 AC 3 28 Auto 3 29 Ch1 Ch 3 28 3 50 Coupling 3 28 DC 3 28 Edge 2 38 3 27 HF Rej 3 28 Level 3 29 LF Rej 3 28 Mode amp Holdoff 3 29 Noise Rej 3 28 Normal 3 29 Set to 50 2 35 3 29 Set to ECL 3 29 Set to TTL 3 29 Slope 3 29 Source 3 28 3 50 Type 2 38 3 27 3 125 3 126 Video 3 125 3 126 Marker rings 3 74 A 7 Math Waveform Index 6 Differential A 1 FFT A 1 Integral A 1 Optional Advanced A 1 Math waveforms 3 133 Math1 2 3 More menu 3 133 Maximum 3 60 Glossary 5 Mean 3 60 Glossary 5 MEASURE button 3 62 Measure Delay menu Create Measrmnt 3 67 Delay To 3 66 Edges 3 67 Measure Delay To 3 66 OK Create Measurement 3 67 Measure Delay To Measure Delay menu 3 66 Measure menu 2 10 3 62 3 68 Gating 3 63 High Ref 3 65 High Low Setup 3 64 Histogram 3 64 Low Ref 3 65 Mid Ref 3 65 Mid2 Ref 3 65 Min Max 3 64 Reference Levels 3 65 Remove Measrmnt 3 63 3 69 Select Measrmnt 3 62 3 66 Set Levels in units 3 65 Sn
96. 2 illustrates the different modes and lists the benefits of each Use it to help select the appropriate mode for your application In Sample mode the oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample of perhaps many during each acquisition interval An acquisition interval is the time covered by the waveform record divided by the record length This is the default mode Peak Detect mode alternates between saving the highest sample in one acquisi tion interval and lowest sample in the next acquisition interval That mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling If you set the time base so fast faster than 500 ns that it requires real time interpolation or equivalent time sampling the mode automatically changes from Peak Detect to Sample although the menu selection does not change TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 5 Acquisition Modes Ju Single Waveform Acquisition Samples Acquired in Four Acquisition Displayed Waveform Drawn Acquisition Intervals Mode Record Points on CRT Interval 1 2 3 4 Interval 1 2 3 4 i 3 a E r 0 E 0 a Tuer WERK wu Sample 0 Uses first sample in interval Use for fastest acquisition rate This is the default mode Slololelole e Fa _ e e e Peak Detec
97. 27 Edges Measure Delay menu 3 67 empty Saved waveform status 3 101 Index 3 Index Encapsulated Postscript 3 35 Enter Char Labelling menu 3 32 3 34 Envelope acquisition mode 3 8 Glossary 3 Envelope Acquire menu 3 9 EPS Color Img Hardcopy menu 3 36 EPS Color Plt Hardcopy menu 3 36 EPS Mono Img Hardcopy menu 3 36 EPS Mono Plt Hardcopy menu 3 36 Epson 3 35 Epson Hardcopy menu 3 36 Equivalent time sampling 2 41 Equivalent time sampling random Glossary 3 External Clock Horizontal menu 3 49 F Factory initialization settings E 1 E 4 factory Saved setup status 3 97 Fall time 3 60 Glossary 3 Falling edge Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Falling edge Main Trigger menu 3 29 File Port optional 3 37 File System 3 31 3 34 A 1 File Utilities File Utilities menu 3 31 Save Recall Setup menu 3 99 Save Recall Waveform menu 3 103 File Utilities menu 3 31 Confirm Delete 3 34 Copy 3 33 Create Directory 3 34 Delete 3 32 File Utilities 3 31 Format 3 34 Overwrite Lock 3 34 Print 3 33 Rename 3 32 Filter Display menu 3 23 Fine Scale Vertical menu 3 123 Firmware version 3 19 Fit to screen Horizontal menu 3 47 Fixtured active probes 3 85 FORCE TRIG button 2 36 Format Display menu 3 24 Format File Utilities menu 3 34 Format Hardcopy menu 3 36 Frame Display menu 3 24 Frequency 2 25 3 60 Glossary 3 Front Cover A 1 Front panel 2 4 Full Display menu 3 24
98. 3 119 Amplitude Units 3 120 Base 3 120 Function 3 117 3 118 H Bars 3 117 3 118 Horizontal Units 3 119 Independent 3 118 IRE NTSC 3 120 seconds 3 119 Tracking 3 118 Video Line Number 3 119 Cursor Readouts 3 116 Cursor Speed 3 120 Cursors 2 48 3 115 3 120 Glossary 2 How to use 3 117 Custom Video Trigger menu 3 126 Cycle area 3 59 Glossary 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index Cycle mean 3 59 Glossary 2 Cycle RMS 3 59 Glossary 3 D Date Time On hardcopies 3 37 To set 3 38 DC coupling 2 34 Glossary 3 DC Main Trigger menu 3 28 Delay by Events Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 Delay by Lines Video Trigger menu 3 127 Delay by Time Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 Delay by Time Video Trigger menu 3 127 Delay by Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 Delay measurement 3 66 Glossary 3 Delay time Glossary 3 Delay To Measure Delay menu 3 66 Delayed Only Horizontal menu 3 14 Delayed Runs After Main 2 35 2 38 Delayed Runs After Main Horizontal menu 3 14 3 49 Delayed Scale Horizontal menu 3 48 DELAYED TRIG button 2 35 3 16 Delayed trigger 2 35 2 38 3 13 3 18 How to set up 3 14 3 18 Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 3 18 Chi Ch2 3 16 Coupling 3 17 Delay by 3 16 Delay by Events 3 16 Delay by Time 3 16 Falling edge 3 17 Level 3 17 Rising edge 3 17 Set to 50 3 18 Set to ECL 3 17 Set to TTL 3 17 Slope 3 17 Source 3 16 Delayed Trigge
99. A amp TDS 460A User Manual Remote Communication You may want to integrate your oscilloscope into a system environment and remotely control your oscilloscope or exchange measurement or waveform data with a computer This section explains how to prepare and setup the oscilloscope for control and operation over the IEEE Std 488 2 1987 GPIB interface To Prepare for Remote Operation To transfer data between the digitizing oscilloscope and other instruments over the GPIB do the following tasks to make sure the instruments support GPIB protocols and observe GPIB Interface requirements Check GPIB Protocols Make sure the instruments you are connecting support GPIB protocols The GPIB provides the following features m Remote instrument control m Bidirectional data transfer m Device compatibility m Status and event reporting Besides the base protocols Tektronix has defined codes and formats for messages that travel over the GPIB Each device that follows these codes and formats such as the TDS 410A TDS 420A and TDS 460A supports standard commands Use of instruments that support these commands can greatly simplify development of GPIB systems Know the GPIB Interface To connect the oscilloscope to GPIB networks read and follow these rules Requirements SIER Connect no more than 15 devices including the controller to a single bus m Connect one device load every two meters about six feet of cable length to maintain bus
100. A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 85 Probe Selection Current Probes Optical Probes 3 86 Two types of current probes are available one that measures AC current only and AC DC probes that utilize the Hall effect to accurately measure the AC and DC components of a signal AC only current probes use a transformer to convert AC current flux into a voltage signal to the oscilloscope and have a frequency response from a few hundred Hertz up to 1 GHz AC DC current probes include Hall effect semiconductor devices and provide frequency response from DC to 50 MHz Use a current probe see Figure 3 39 by clipping its jaws around the wire carrying the current that you want to measure Unlike an ammeter which you must connect in series with the circuit Because current probes are non invasive with loading typically in the milliohm to low Q range they are especially useful where low loading of the circuit is important Current probes can also make differential measurements by measuring the results of two opposing currents in two conductors in the jaws of the probe Figure 3 39 A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt 03 Optical probes let you blend the functions of an optical power meter with the high speed analog waveform analysis capability of an oscilloscope You have the capability of acquiring displaying and analyzing optical and electrical signals simultaneously Applications include measuring the transient optical properti
101. DS 420A amp TDS 460A Performance Verification tells how to verify the performance of the digitizing oscilloscope m The TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual describes use of the Advanced DSP Math option for TDS oscilloscopes equipped with that option only m The TDS Family Option 13 Instruction Manual describes using the optional Centronics and RS 232 interfaces for obtaining hardcopy for TDS oscilloscopes equipped with that option only m The TDS Family Option 3P Printer Pack Instruction Manual describes using the optional printer pack for obtaining hardcopy for TDS oscilloscopes equipped with that option only m The TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A Service Manual provides informa tion for maintaining and servicing your digitizing oscilloscope to the module level TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual xi Preface Conventions xii In the Getting Started and Reference sections you will find various procedures which contain steps of instructions for you to perform To keep those instructions clear and consistent this manual uses the following conventions m Names of front panel controls and menu labels appear in boldface print m Names also appear in the same case initial capitals all uppercase etc in the manual as is used on the oscilloscope front panel and menus Front panel names are all upper case letters for example VERTICAL MENU CH 1 and SETUP Instruction steps are numbered The numb
102. DS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual for information on cursor units with integrated differentiated and FFT waveforms TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual SS a Vertical Control You can control the vertical position and scale of the selected waveform using the vertical menu and knobs To Change Vertical Scale and Position By changing the vertical scale you can focus on a particular portion of a waveform By adjusting the vertical position you can move the waveform up or down on the display That is particularly useful when you are comparing two or more waveforms To change the vertical scale and position use the vertical POSITION and vertical SCALE knobs The vertical controls only affect the selected waveform The POSITION knob simply adds screen divisions to the reference point of the selected waveform Adding divisions moves the waveform up and subtracting them moves the waveform down You also can adjust the waveform position using the offset parameter in the Vertical menu discussed later in this article If you want the POSITION knob to move faster press the SHIFT button When the light next to the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the POSITION knob speeds up significantly To Check the Vertical Scale Check the Vertical readout at the bottom left part of the display for the volts di vision setting of each displayed channel the selected channel is in inverse vid
103. ENU button 2 38 3 27 3 125 Trigger Point Readout 3 22 Trigger Position Horizontal menu 3 47 Trigger Status Lights 2 36 Trigger delayed How to set up 3 14 3 18 Trigger Status menu 3 19 Tutorial 2 13 TV Delay Mode Video Trigger menu 3 127 Type Main Trigger menu 2 38 3 27 3 125 3 126 Typical Characteristics Defined B 17 Listed B 17 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index U Undershoot Glossary 6 user Saved setup status 3 97 UTILITY button 3 36 3 91 Utility Menu OK Erase Ref amp Panel Memory 3 99 Tek Secure Erase Memory 3 99 Utility menu 2 11 3 36 3 91 Configure 3 36 3 91 GPIB 3 91 Hardcopy 3 91 Hardcopy Talk Only 3 36 VO 3 36 3 91 Off Bus 3 91 Port 3 91 System 3 36 3 91 Talk Listen Address 3 91 V V Limit Acquire menu 3 54 Variable Persistence Display menu 3 22 Vectors 3 21 Vectors Display menu 3 21 Vertical 3 111 Bar cursors 2 48 3 115 Glossary 9 Control 3 121 3 124 Offset 2 44 3 123 Position 2 44 3 121 POSITION knob 2 44 Readout 3 121 Scale 3 121 SCALE knob 2 17 2 44 3 121 System 2 17 2 44 2 46 Vertical menu 100 MHz 3 123 20 MHz 3 123 Bandwidth 3 123 Coupling 3 122 Fine Scale 3 123 Full 3 123 Offset 3 123 Position 3 123 Set to Zero 3 123 VERTICAL MENU button 2 21 Vertical POSITION knob 3 121 3 136 Vertical Readout 3 121 Vertical SCALE knob 3 121 3 136 VGA display F 1 Video Class Video
104. Full Vertical menu 3 123 Index 4 Function Cursor menu 3 117 3 118 Fuse 1 3 2 5 G Gated Measurements 3 63 Glossary 4 Gating Measure menu 3 63 General purpose high input resistance probes 3 83 General purpose knob 2 7 2 25 2 27 Glossary 4 GPIB 2 5 3 89 3 92 Glossary 4 Interconnect cabling 3 90 Procedures for using 3 91 Selecting and configuring the port 3 91 GPIB Hardcopy menu 3 37 GPIB Utility menu 3 91 Graticule 3 24 Glossary 4 Measurements 2 49 2 50 Graticule Display menu 3 24 3 26 Grid Display menu 3 24 Ground coupling Glossary 4 Ground lead inductance 3 71 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 buttons 3 136 H H Bars Cursor menu 3 117 3 118 H Limit Acquire menu 3 55 Hardcopy 3 35 3 44 Glossary 4 How to print controller 3 41 How to print no controller 3 39 How to save to disk 3 40 Spool 3 39 3 40 Hardcopy Talk Only Utility menu 3 36 HARDCOPY button 3 31 3 36 3 91 Hardcopy if Condition Met Acquire menu 3 56 Hardcopy Interface Optional RS 232 Centronic A 1 Hardcopy menu BMP Color 3 36 BMP Mono 3 36 Clear Spool 3 37 3 40 Deskjet 3 36 DPU411 II 3 36 DPU412 3 36 EPS Color Img 3 36 EPS Color Pit 3 36 EPS Mono Img 3 36 EPS Mono Pit 3 36 Epson 3 36 Format 3 36 GPIB 3 37 HPGL 3 36 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index Interleaf 3 36 Landscape 3 37 Laserjet 3 36 Layout 3 37 OK Confirm Cle
105. GER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 AC Line or Auxiliary side a Tek Run 100KS s Sample Edge Slope 2 004 TO M s00ys Chi ov Source coupling hl Level ode TYPE amp Edge gt chi DE N Holdoff OS LOLO C C C O o Figure 3 14 Main Trigger Menu Edge Type To select the coupling you want press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Coupling main gt DC AC HF Rej LF Rej or Noise Rej side NOTE If you select the Auxiliary trigger source select DC or HF Rej coupling DC passes all of the input signal In other words it passes both AC and DC components to the trigger circuit AC passes only the alternating components of an input signal above 30 Hz It removes the DC component from the trigger signal HF Rej removes the high frequency portion of the triggering signal That allows only the low frequency components to pass on to the triggering system to start an acquisition High frequency rejection attenuates signals above 30 kHz TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Edge Triggering Um LF Rej does the opposite of high frequency rejection Low frequency rejection attenuates signals below 80 kHz Noise Rej provides lower sensitivity It requires additional signal amplitude for stable triggering reducing the chance of falsely
106. However you may want to trigger on a positive polarity pulse when probing circuitry that inverts the video signal You can easily change the polarity by using the Syne Polarity option Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Sync Polarity main gt Neg Sync or Pos Sync side You specify the delay for a video trigger with the TV Delay Mode option Since video signals are composed of line information and other time specified components the TV Delay Mode option lets you delay by lines or time see Figure 3 61 Press the TRIGGER MENU TV Delay Mode main gt Delay by Lines or Delay by Time side Use the general purpose knob to enter the value If you want to enter a large number using the general purpose knob press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light next to the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly z Tek Run oes Sample f chi ne Delay Mode TYPE Class Soure polarity REN a amp lt Video gt lt NTSC gt Negative tines Holdoff Xa lella eee e Figure 3 61 Video Trigger Menu TV Delay Mode TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 127 Video Triggering To Select TV Fields If you selected NTSC PAL or SECAM in the Class menu there is a Scan menu that lets you choose between triggering on the odd
107. LOLO O C C O o Figure 3 27 Measurement Readouts TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 61 Measuring Waveforms Measurement Units Measurement 1 is the top readout Measurement 2 is below it and so forth Once a measurement readout is displayed in the screen area it stays in its position even when you remove any measurement readouts above it Selecting External clock from the Horizontal Clock menu changes the units of measurements related to the horizontal scale of a waveform When switching from internal to external clocks units of seconds become clocks units of Hertz become clock and units of Vsec become Vclocks Select and Display Measurements 3 62 To use the automatic measurements you first need to obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured Pressing AUTOSET may help Once you have a stable display press MEASURE to bring up the Measure menu Figure 3 28 Ken Tek Run 100KS s Sample Select Measurement Delay Burst width 100mY M 5004us Chi 108mY Eu ne air En Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot Peg Vieasrmnt OFF Histogram Levels LO C O C P O M DID COI aD Figure 3 28 Measure Menu Measurements are made on the selected waveform The measurement display tells you the channel the measurement is being made on 1 Press
108. PositiveWidth PositiveDutyCycle Bea x 100 Amplitude voltage measurement Max High Amplitude BR PositiveOvershoot Note that this value should never be negative Timing measurement The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse If MCross1Polarity then PositiveWidth MCross2 MCross1 else PositiveWidth MCross3 MCross2 Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value default 10 to a HighRef value default 90 Figure C 3 shows a rising edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a Rise Time measurement 1 Searching from Start to End find the first sample in the measurement zone less than LowRef 2 From this sample continue the search to find the first positive crossing of LowRef The time of this crossing is the low rise time or TLR Use linear interpolation if necessary TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms RMS 3 From TLR continue the search looking for a crossing of HighRef Update TLR if subsequent LowRef crossings are found If a HighRef crossing is found it becomes the high rise time or THR Use linear interpolation if necessary 4 RiseTime THR TLR Rise Time TLR THR High HighR ef LowR ef Low Figure C 3 Rise Time Amplitude voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage If Start End
109. Power off 1 5 Power on 1 4 Pretrigger Glossary 7 Preview Zoom menu 3 138 Principal power switch 1 4 2 5 Print File Utilities menu 3 33 Printer DPU 411 A 1 DPU 412 A 1 Probe accessories Compact to miniature probe tip adapter 3 78 A 6 Dual lead adapter 3 79 IC protector tip 3 78 Index 8 Long ground leads 3 74 Low inductance ground lead 3 75 Low inductance spring tips 3 77 A 7 Marker rings 3 74 A 7 Probe tip to chassis adapter 3 77 A 7 Probe tip to circuit board adapters 3 76 Retractable hook tip 3 74 SMT KlipChip 3 76 A 7 Probe Cal 1 5 Probe tip to chassis adapter 3 77 A 7 Probe tip to circuit board adapters 3 76 Probes Accessories 3 72 3 80 A 4 A 5 A 6 Active voltage 3 84 3 88 Additional A 2 Analog Differential A 2 Compensation 2 17 3 81 Glossary 7 Connection 2 13 3 71 3 80 Current 3 86 Definition Glossary 7 Differential active 3 85 Fixtured active 3 85 General purpose high input resistance 3 83 High speed 3 85 High voltage 3 84 Low impedance Zo 3 83 Optical 3 86 Passive 3 81 Passive voltage 3 83 3 88 Selection 3 83 3 88 Time to voltage converter 3 87 Propagation delay 3 59 Q Quantizing Glossary 7 R Rack mounting A 2 Rate 1 Video Trigger menu 3 129 Rate 2 Video Trigger menu 3 129 Rate 3 Video Trigger menu 3 129 Rate 4 Video Trigger menu 3 129 Readout Acquisition 3 9 Channel 2 6 3 107 3 136 Cursors 2 6 Edge trigger 3 27
110. READY SINGLE TRIG ARM FORCE TRIG C Figure 2 4 SET LEVEL TO 50 Button Examine the Display Read the following information to become familiar with the oscilloscope display Elements Figure 2 5 shows the display that results from the oscilloscope reset There are several important points to observe m The trigger level bar shows that the waveform is triggered at a level near 50 of its amplitude from step 4 m The trigger position indicator shows that the trigger position of the waveform is located at the horizontal center of the graticule m The channel reference indicator shows the vertical position of channel 1 with no input signal This indicator points to the ground level for the channel when its vertical offset is set to 0 V in the vertical menu when vertical offset is not set to O V the indicator points to the vertical offset level m The trigger readout shows that the digitizing oscilloscope is triggering on channel 1 Ch1 on a rising edge and that the trigger level is about 200 300 mV TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 15 Tutorial m The time base readout shows that the main time base is set to a horizontal scale of 500 us div m The channel readout indicates that channel 1 Ch1 is displayed with DC coupling In AC coupling appears after the volts div readout The digitizing oscilloscope always displays channel at reset Right now the channel time base and trigger readouts appear i
111. Repair Service Assurance provides one year of post warranty repair support It is available in one year increments up to two years m CAL Calibrate Service Assurance provides one year of calibration support It is available in one year increments up to five years For further information contact your Tektronix Representative TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification This Chapter begins with a general description of the traits of the TDS 400A Di gitizing Oscilloscopes Three sections follow one for each of three classes of traits nominal traits warranted characteristics and typical characteristics General The TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes are portable four channel instruments suitable for use in a variety of test and measurement applications and systems Table B 1 lists key features Table B 1 Key Features of the TDS 400A Oscilloscopes Feature Digitizing rate maximum Analog bandwidth Channels Record lengths maximum Description 100 MS s on each channel simultaneously TDS 460A 400 MHz TDS 420A 200 MHz TDS 410A 200 MHz TDS 460A Four each with 8 bit resolution TDS 420A Four each with 8 bit resolution TDS 410A Two each with 8 bit resolution 30 000 samples 120 000 with option 1M Acquisition modes Trigger modes Display Modes Sample envelope average high resolution and peak detect Edge With Option 05 video trigger modes include NTSC SECAM PAL
112. S Se Figure 3 67 Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None Select Zoom or Dual Zoom To select between waveform zoom and dual waveform zoom press ZOOM gt Mode main Then press Dual Zoom side to toggle Dual Zoom OFF or ON NOTE Dual zoom displays a second zoomed view of the selected unzoomed waveform The second zoomed view is offset in time from the first zoomed view Also zoom must be enabled On or Preview to see the dual zoom displays To Set Dual Zoom Offset To set the offset in time of the second zoomed waveform from the first press ZOOM gt Mode main gt Dual Zoom Offset side Then turn the general purpose knob to set the offset Dual zoom offset is always positive The oscilloscope sets the offset as close to the requested value as possible An offset request of 0 0 insures that the zoom boxes are butted against each other regardless of the zoom factor TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 137 Zoom Figure 3 68 Zoom Preview Mode 3 138 To Preview Zoom Selected Graticule Zoom Preview draws a box around the zoomed portion s of the unmagnified selected waveform It also displays both the magnified and unmagnified waveforms in separate half height graticules see Figure 3 68 To preview zoom press Zoom Mode main gt Preview side In preview mode the zoom magnification factors are not displayed However scale factor
113. Select Video Class To Select the Source 3 126 Using the Class option you can select predefined setups NTSC PAL or SECAM or customize the setup Press the TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Video pop up Class main gt NTSC PAL SECAM or Custom pop up Figure 3 60 NTSC has a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz PAL has a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz SECAM has a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz Custom lets you specify the frequency range of the video signal The different ranges are listed in the Scan Parameter side menu discussed later in this section Tek Run m Sample 100 COI COIO O 1 PA L SECAM Custom nc elay ode Class u polarity Mode N en amp lt ATSC gt Negative tines Mm Holdoff Ololololololo Figure 3 60 Video Trigger Menu Class You need to select which source you want the trigger to come from On the TDS 420A and TDS 460A press the TRIGGER MENU gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side On the TDS 410A press the TRIGGER MENU gt Source main gt Ch1 or Ch2 side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Video Triggering To Set Sync Polarity m er To Specify TV Delay Mode Negative polarity is the standard for horizontal and vertical synch pulses
114. Start x SampleInterval For details of the integration algorithm see page C 12 Amplitude voltage measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Examine all Waveform samples from Start to End inclusive and set Min equal to the smallest magnitude Waveform value found Timing measurement The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage NegativeWidth is defined in Negative Width below If Period 0 or undefined then return an error NegativeWidth Porod 70 NegativeDutyCycle Amplitude voltage measurement Low Min x 100 NegativeOvershoot Ample Note that this value should never be negative unless High or Low are set out of range TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms Negative Width Timing measurement The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse If MCross1Polarity gt then NegativeWidth MCross2 MCross1 else NegativeWidth MCross3 MCross2 Peak to Peak Amplitude measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude PeaktoPeak Max Min Period Timing measurement Time taken for one complete signal cycle The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Period MCross3 MCross1 Phase Timing measurement The amount of phase shift expressed in degrees of t
115. T KlipChip to provide access to very small signal and ground test points Although the dual lead adapter is an improvement over the long ground leads in terms of added inductance measurements at frequencies greater than 30 MHz may require using one of the low inductance ground leads Because of the length of the signal lead the dual lead configuration is also more susceptible to signal crosstalk than other tip configurations TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 79 Probe Accessories 3 80 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Compensation Passive probes require compensation to ensure maximum distortion free input to the digitizing oscilloscope and to avoid high frequency amplitude errors see Figure 3 36 Probe Compensated Correctly Probe Overcompensated Probe Undercompensated Figure 3 36 How Probe Compensation Affects Signals To Compensate Passive Probes Do the following steps to compensate your probe 1 Connect the probe to the probe compensation signal PROBE ADJ on the front panel 2 Press AUTOSET NOTE When you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope such as the P6205 the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a high impedance passive probe like the P6138 you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ Step 4 explains how to change the input impedance 3 Press VERTICAL MENU Bandwidth main gt
116. Table 3 4 Autoset Defaults Cont Control Changed by Autoset to Acquire Stop After RUN STOP button only Display Style Vectors Display Format YT Display Intensity Overall If less than 50 set to 75 Horizontal Clock Internal Horizontal Position Horizontal Record Length Horizontal Scale Horizontal Time Base Centered within the graticule window Unchanged As determined by the signal frequency Main Only T Selected channel mit Test Trigger Coupling Off Numerically lowest of the displayed channels DC Trigger Holdoff Trigger Level Trigger Position Trigger Slope 1 Midpoint of data for the trigger source Unchanged Positive Trigger Source Numerically lowest of the displayed channels the selected channel Trigger Type Edge Vertical Bandwidth Full Vertical Coupling DC unless AC was previously set AC remains unchanged Vertical Offset 0 volts Vertical Scale Zoom As determined by the signal level off Do the following steps to reset your oscilloscope to its factory default settings Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side See Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings on page E 1 for a list of the factory defaults TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual a Signal Path Compensation Signal Path Compensation SPC minimizes electrical offsets in the vertical horizontal and trigger amplifiers
117. User Manual Tektronix 7 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A Digitizing Oscilloscopes 070 9219 00 Copyright Tektronix Inc 1995 All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 years from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be respons
118. a Hardcopy Device To connect the digitizing oscilloscope directly to a hardcopy device determine which interface and cable the device uses and connect accordingly See Figure 3 20 Some devices such as the Tektronix HC100 Plotter use the GPIB interface Many printers such as the Tektronix HC200 use Centronics interfaces optional on the TDS 400A Many hardcopy devices including the HC100 and HC200 with option 03 use RS 232 interfaces optional on the TDS 400A Check the documentation for your hardcopy device If your device uses an RS 232 or Centronics interface and your oscilloscope does not have the Option 13 RS 232 Centronics Hardcopy Interface see Connection Strategies on page 3 43 Digitizing Oscilloscope Hardcopy Device GPIB RS 232 or Centronics Cable Figure 3 20 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope Directly to the Hardcopy Device Print To print a single hardcopy or send additional hardcopies to the digitizing oscilloscope spool queue while waiting for earlier hardcopies to finish printing press HARDCOPY While the hardcopy is being sent to the printer the oscilloscope displays the message Hardcopy in process Press HARDCOPY to abort Abort To stop and discard the hardcopy being sent press HARDCOPY again while the hardcopy in process message is still on screen Add to the Spool To add additional hardcopies to the printer spool press HARDCOPY again after
119. a cursor measurement To select Function the type of cursors you want do the following steps 1 To display the cursor menu press CURSOR see Figure 3 55 2 Press CURSOR gt Function main gt H Bars V Bars Paired or Off side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 117 Taking Cursor Measurements Position of Vertical Bar Cursors Useful for Locating Cursors Outside the Display Tek Run 250KS7s Sampie amp Cursor Function Cursor Readout Paired off Selected Cursor Solid Vertical Bar Non selected Cursor Dashed Vertical Bar Tomy M 200us Chi F 110mV Oloo Ololololololo Figure 3 56 Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts Set Mode and Adjust the To select the cursor mode and adjust the cursors in either mode do the Cursors following steps 1 Press CURSOR Mode main Independent or Tracking side Independent makes each cursor positionable without regard to the position of the other cursor Tracking makes both cursors positionable in tandem that is both cursors move in unison and maintain a fixed horizontal or vertical distance between each other 2 Adjust the cursors according to the mode you have selected m To adjust either cursor in independent mode use the general purpose knob to move the selected active cursor
120. a math waveform you have created or a reference waveform you have stored press MORE and select the waveform from the More menu Press WAVEFORM OFF while the MORE button is lit to remove display of the waveform selected in the More menu When you turn off a waveform the digitizing oscilloscope automatically selects the next highest priority waveform Figure 3 51 shows how the oscilloscope prioritizes waveforms TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Selecting Channels If you are turning off more than one waveform and you start by turning off a channel waveform all channels will be turned off before going to the MORE waveforms If you start by turning off the MORE waveforms allthe MORE waveforms will be turned off before going to the channel waveforms If you turn off a channel that is a trigger source it continues to be the trigger source even though the waveform is not displayed 5 6 7 MATH3 8 9 10 1 CH1 All models 2 CH2 All models 3 4 CH4 TDS 420A and TDS 460A CH3 TDS 420A and TDS 460A MATHI MATH2 REF1 REF2 REF3 11 REF4 Figure 3 51 Waveform Selection Priority For More Information See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 101 See Waveform Math on page 3 131 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 109 Selecting Channels 3 110 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C Setting Up Automatically Autoset and Reset The TDS 400A can autom
121. after shows the voltage of the selected cursor relative to ground see Figure 3 55 With the video trigger option you can also display the voltage in IRE units 3 116 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Taking Cursor Measurements V Bars The value after A shows the time or frequency difference between the cursors The value after shows the time frequency of the selected cursor relative to the trigger point With the video trigger option you can also display the line number Paired The value after one A shows the voltage difference between the two Xs the other A shows the time or frequency difference between the two long vertical bars The value after the shows the voltage at the X of the selected cursor relative to ground see Figure 3 56 Tek Run 100KS s Sample Cursor Readout H Bars Re Function B 4 eke we Selected Cursor Solid Line Non selected Cursor Dashed Line Paired Toomv TO M 500s Chi 300mv oOlolololdo Function Mode rs indep Ololololololo Figure 3 55 H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts Paired cursors can only show voltage differences when they remain on screen If the paired cursors are moved off screen horizontally Edge replaces the voltage values in the cursor readout Select the Cursor Do this procedure and those that follow to take
122. al System You can adjust the vertical position of the selected waveform by moving it up or down on the display For example when trying to compare multiple waveforms you can put one above another and compare them or you can overlay the two waveforms on top of each other To move the selected waveform turn the vertical POSITION knob You can also alter the vertical scale The digitizing oscilloscope shows the scale in volts per division for each active channel toward the bottom left of the display As you turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise the value decreases resulting in higher resolution because you see a smaller part of the waveform As you turn it counter clockwise the scale increases allowing you to see more of the waveform but with lower resolution Besides using the position and scale knobs you can set the vertical scale and position with exact numbers You do that with the Vertical menu Fine Scale and Position selections and the general purpose knob Vertical offset changes where the channel reference indicator is shown with respect to the graticule Offset adds a voltage to the reference indicator without changing the scale That feature allows you to move the waveform up and down over a large area without decreasing the resolution Offset is useful in cases where a waveform has a DC bias One example is looking at a small ripple on a power supply output You may be trying to look at a 100 mV ripple on top of a 15 V supply Th
123. al iz STATUS Status Menu cam Status Banner see page 3 19 aes DELAYED TRIG F TRIGGER Trigger Menu Video MENU a a nic elay Scan Rate Mode i ass Polarity Mode amp amp see page 3 125 C lt Video gt lt custom gt Negative Lines interlace Holdoff 2 10 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual At a Glance Press these buttons To bring up these menus UTILITY Utility Menu Calibration an ET Te Tr see page 3 113 gt ED al Pass Pass Bass Pass Pass UTILITY ili 5 i O SHIFT DISPLAY Utility Menu Config Cait er R see page 3 38 C C lt Config gt Memory i l UTILITY Utility Menu Diagnostics DISPLAY i CD CD System Area Execute oop Error see the Service manual lt DiagfErr gt kAlt Areas Once Log g UTILITY Utility Menu 1 0 N Configure see pages 3 89 and 3 36 O O ro cce MRS tical Ch IM VERTICAL Vertical Channel Menu MENU OPM Bandwidth ning sare Position Offset see page 3 121 C DC Full OMV g div ov Zoom Menu on Pe oc raticute Reset see page 3 135 C an Upper TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 11 At a Glance 2 12 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual BE Tutorial This section quickly acquaints you with some of the fundamental operations required to use TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes to take measurements Start this tutorial by doing Setting Up for the Examples on this page Setting Up for the Examples Pe
124. ally Autoset and Reset on page 3 111 Delayed Triggering on page 3 13 Horizontal Control on page 3 45 Vertical Control on page 3 121 and Zoom on page 3 135 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Measurements The digitizing oscilloscope not only displays graphs of voltage versus time it also helps you measure the displayed information see Figure 2 31 The oscilloscope provides three measurement classes automated cursor and graticule measurements Figure 2 31 shows all three measurement classes This section briefly describes how to take measurements Cursor Automated Graticule Readouts Measurements Chl Frequency 100 MHz Ch 1 Period 10 ns Cursors Figure 2 31 Graticule Cursor and Automated Measurements Automated Measurements You make automated measurements by merely pressing a few buttons The digitizing oscilloscope does all the calculating for you Because automated measurements use the waveform record points they are more accurate than cursor and graticule measurements Press the MEASURE button for the automated measurement menus These menus let you make amplitude typically in volts sometimes in time typically in seconds or hertz and area in volt seconds measurements You can select and display up to four measurements at a time See Table 3 3 on page 3 59 for a list of all the automatic measurements and their definitions
125. and Custom Infinite and variable persistence roll fitto screen and dual waveform zoom Storage NVRAM storage for saving waveforms hardcopies and setups With Option IF 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch DOS 3 3 or later floppy disk 0 Math User interface Full GPIB programmability Hardcopy output using GPIB and with Option 13 RS 232 or Centronics ports Including invert add subtract multiply and with Option 2F integral differential and FFT A graphical user interface on line help and a logical front panel layout TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 1 Appendix B Specification B 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Nominal Traits Nominal Traits This section contains a collection of tables that list the various nominal traits that describe the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes Included are electrical and mechanical traits Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as Four all identical for the trait Input Channels Number of rather than in terms of limits that are performance requirements Table B 2 Nominal Traits Signal Acquisition System Name Bandwidth Selections Digitizers Number of Digitized Bits Number of Digitized Resolution HiRes Mode Description 20 MHz 100 MHz and FULL TDS 410A and TDS 420A 200 MHz TDS 460A 400 MHz TDS 410A Two both identical TDS 420A and TDS 460A Four all ide
126. and so forth these files using the file system Read the sections listed under For More Information on page 3 34 for information on saving hardcopies setups and waveforms To Access the File Utilities The File Utilities menu lets you delete rename copy print files create a new directory operate the confirm delete and overwrite lock and format disks To bring up the File Utilities menu 1 Press the SETUP button to bring up the Save Recall Setup menu or press the WAVEFORM button to bring up the Save Recall Waveform menu or press the Shift HARDCOPY button to bring up the Hardcopy menu 2 Press File Utilities in the main menu to bring up the File Utilities side menu See Figure 3 15 Tek Run 50 068575 ET Sample eca Saved Setup Use amp to choose EJ E0 25 E8 Press SELECT to change G F TEKOO001 IMG TEKOOO00 CSY TEKO0001 DAT ave Current Setup eca Factory Setup Free 648KB 38422 36 11 22 09 41 06 8957 99 10 09 03 29 12 3512 99 10 09 03 30 00 File Utilities Delete Rename oOlolololdo CO Figure 3 15 File Utilities TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 31 File System NOTE The amount of free space on the disk is shown in the upper right corner of the display The digitizing oscilloscope shows the amount in Kbytes or i
127. and to read about topics not covered in this section see Reference Page 3 1 lists the topics covered TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 1 Functional Overview 2 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual HE Ata Glance The At a Glance section contains illustrations of the display the front and rear panels and the menu system These illustrations help you understand and operate the digitizing oscilloscope This section also contains a visual guide to using the menu system Front Panel Map Left Side Tektronix TDS 460A 3888 uosoore toh ue Side Menu Buttons CLEAR MENU Removes Menus from the Display ON STBY Switch Main Menu Buttons page 1 3 page 2 7 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 3 At a Glance Front Panel Map Right Side Saving and Recalling Waveforms page 3 104 Saving and Recalling Setups page 3 97 Reset the Oscilloscope page 2 1 Optional File System page 3 31 Autoset page 3 111 Measurement System page 3 59 Help page 3 3 Status page 3 19 Hardcopy page 3 35 SELECT Acquisition Modes page 3 5 a MENU s ACQUIRE MENU A ERECALE APPLICATION Enmooory roch Cursor Measurements ai DAN page 3 115 See Shift when lit selects alternate Selecting Channels j ee SR TRIGGERS menus printed i
128. annel selection buttons As when displaying individual measurements you must have a stable display of your signal and that signal must have all the segments necessary for the measurement you want To display a snapshot of automated measurements do the following steps 1 Press Snapshot main to pop up a snapshot of all available single waveform measurements See Figure 2 17 The snapshot display includes the label Ch 1 meaning that the measure ments displayed are taken on the channel 1 waveform You take a snapshot of a waveform in another channel by first selecting that channel using the channel selection buttons TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 27 Tutorial Tek Run 100KS s Sample Snapshot Annan Snapshot on El Period 1 000ms Freq 999 84 Hz Width 500us Width 500ps E Erstwd 4 000ms Rise Sys Fall BUS Duty 50 0 Duty 50 0 Over 33 2 Over 16 5 High 512mV Low 16mV Max 328mV Min 16mV Ampl 496m Pk Pk 544mv y Mean 262 8m CycMean 262 4mYV RMS 361 6mV CycRMS 360 4mV nv g Area 1 31156mVs CycArea 262 40uVs Select i KR Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot forech Measrmnt OFF Histagram Levels snapshot olololololo ol Oloo Figure 2 17 Snapshot of Channel 1 The snapshot measurements do not continuously update Snapshot e
129. apshot 3 68 Measurement Amplitude 3 59 Glossary 1 Area 3 59 Glossary 1 Burst width 3 59 Glossary 2 Cycle area 3 59 Glossary 2 Cycle mean 3 59 Glossary 2 Cycle RMS 3 59 Glossary 3 Delay 3 66 Glossary 3 Duty cycle 2 25 Glossary 6 Glossary 7 Fall time 3 60 Frequency 2 25 3 60 Glossary 3 Gated Glossary 4 High 3 60 Glossary 4 Low 3 60 Glossary 5 Maximum 3 60 Glossary 5 Mean 3 60 Glossary 5 Minimum 3 60 Glossary 5 Negative duty cycle 3 60 Negative overshoot 3 60 Negative width 3 60 Overshoot Glossary 7 Peak to peak 3 60 Glossary 6 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index Period 3 60 Glossary 6 Phase 3 60 Glossary 6 Positive duty cycle 3 60 Positive overshoot 3 61 Positive width 3 61 Propagation delay 3 59 Readout 3 61 3 63 Reference levels 2 25 2 27 Rise time 2 25 3 61 Glossary 7 RMS 3 61 Glossary 8 Undershoot Glossary 6 Width 2 25 Glossary 6 Glossary 7 Measurement Accuracy Ensuring maximum 3 113 3 114 Measurements 2 47 2 50 3 59 3 70 Algorithms C 1 C 14 Automated 2 24 2 47 Cursor 2 48 3 115 Gated 3 63 Graticule 2 49 2 50 Snapshot of 3 68 Memory Waveform 3 102 Menu Acquire 3 9 3 53 Banner 3 20 Cursor 3 117 Delayed Trigger 3 16 3 18 Display 3 21 File Utilities 3 31 Horizontal 2 35 3 14 Main 2 6 Main Trigger 2 38 3 27 Measure 2 10 3 62 3 68 More 2 10 3 103 3 131 Operation 2 7 Pop u
130. ar Spool 3 40 PCX 3 36 PCX Color 3 36 Port 3 37 Portrait 3 37 RLE Color 3 36 Thinkjet 3 36 TIFF 3 36 Hardcopy Utility menu 3 91 HELP button 3 3 Help system 3 3 HF Rej Main Trigger menu 3 28 Hi Res acquisition mode 3 7 Hi res acquisition mode Glossary 4 Hi Res Acquire menu 3 9 High 3 60 Glossary 4 High frequency rejection 2 34 High Ref Measure menu 3 65 High speed active probes 3 85 High voltage probes 3 84 High Low Setup Measure menu 3 64 Histogram Measure menu 3 64 Holdoff trigger 2 33 Glossary 4 Horiz Pos Horizontal menu 3 48 Horiz Scale Horizontal menu 3 48 Horizontal 3 111 Bar cursors 2 48 3 115 Glossary 4 Control 3 45 3 52 Menu 2 35 Position 3 46 POSITION knob 2 44 Readouts 3 45 Scale 3 46 SCALE knob 2 17 2 44 System 2 17 2 44 Horizontal Lock Zoom menu 3 136 Horizontal menu 3 14 Clock 3 49 Delayed Only 3 14 Delayed Runs After Main 3 14 3 49 Delayed Scale 3 48 Delayed Triggerable 3 16 3 49 External Clock 3 49 Fit to screen 3 47 Horiz Pos 3 48 Horiz Scale 3 48 Intensified 3 14 3 16 Internal Clock 3 49 Main Scale 3 48 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Record Length 3 47 Set to 10 3 48 Set to 50 3 48 Set to 90 3 48 Time Base 3 14 3 48 Trigger Position 3 47 HORIZONTAL MENU button 2 35 3 14 Horizontal POSITION knob 3 46 3 136 Horizontal Readouts 3 45 Horizontal SCALE knob 3 46 3
131. aring a Waveform to a Limit Template When you use the limit testing feature the first task is to create the limit test template from a waveform Next specify the channel to compare to the template Then you specify the action to take if incoming waveform data exceeds the set limits Finally turn limit testing on so that the parameters you have specified take effect To Create a Limit Test Template To use an incoming or stored waveform to create the limit test template first select a source 1 To access limit testing press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU to bring up the Acquire menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 53 Limit Testing 3 54 2 On TDS 420A and TDS 460A press Create Limit Test Template main gt Template Source side gt Chl Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Math1 Math2 Math3 Refl Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 side On TDS 410A press Create Limit Test Template main gt Template Source side gt Ch1 Ch2 Math1 Math2 Math3 Refl Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 side See Figure 3 26 NOTE The template will be smoother if you acquire the template waveform using Average acquisition mode If you are unsure how to do this see Selecting an Acquisition Mode on page 3 9 Once you have selected a source select a destination for the template 3 Press Template Destination side gt Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 Tek Run 100KS s Sample Template Source Chi Limit Test Template Template Source Template Dest
132. as no effect To change the horizontal scale and position 1 Turn the horizontal SCALE and horizontal POSITION knobs see Figure 3 24 2 If you want the POSITION knob to move faster press the SHIFT button When the light above the shift button is on and the display reads Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the POSITION knob speeds up significantly When you use the horizontal SCALE knob and select a channel you scale all channel waveforms displayed at the same time If you select a math or reference waveform you scale only the selected waveform a HORIZONTAL lt Position gt HORIZONTAL MENU lt SCALE gt Figure 3 24 Horizontal Controls TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Horizontal Control When you use the horizontal POSITION knob and select a channel you position all channel reference and math waveforms displayed at the same time when Horizontal Lock is set to All in the Zoom menu For more information on zoom see page 3 135 To Change Horizontal Parameters Trigger Position Record Length To set the record length set the trigger position and change the position or scale use the Horizontal menu The Horizontal menu also lets you select either a main or delayed view of the time base for acquisitions To define how much of the record is pretrigger and how much posttrigger information use the Trigger Position menu item Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Trigger Position ma
133. ase record The end of the zone corresponds to the end of the delayed record To learn how to define the intensity level of the normal and intensified wave form see Display Modes on page 3 21 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Delayed Triggering Pretrigger Record Posttrigger Record PR Delayed Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Point Main Trigger Source ee u Time Delay gt From Horiz Menu Delayed Runs After Main Start Posttrigger Acquisition Delayed Triggerable By Events Main Trigger Point H sai Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Source Delayed N N N N N N N N N N N Trigger Source u J Ri Start P osttrigger Acquisition Trigger Waiting for nth Event on nth Delayed Trigger Event Where n 5 Delayed Triggerable By Time k oe Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Point Main Trigger Source Delayed N N N N N N N N N N N Trigger ur Lh Time Delay n Start Posttrigger Acquisition From Delay Trig Menu First Trigger After Delay Delayed Triggerable By External Clocks Main Trigger Point k u Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Source External Clock j RR 3 N Start P osttrigger Acquisition Trigger Waiting for nth Clock on nth External Clock Event Where n 5 Figure 3 7 How the Delayed Triggers Work TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 46
134. atically obtain and display a stable waveform of usable size This section describes how to execute autoset and lists the default settings in effect after an autoset Autoset automatically sets up the front panel controls based on the characteristics of the input signal It is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup Autoset makes adjustments in these categories Acquisition Display Horizontal Trigger and Vertical NOTE Autoset may change vertical position in order to position the waveform appropriately It always sets vertical offset to O V Autoset the Oscilloscope Autoset Defaults Do the following steps to automatically setup the oscilloscope 1 Press the Channel Selection button such as CH 1 corresponding to your input channel to make it active 2 Press AUTOSET If you use autoset when one or more channels are displayed the digitizing oscilloscope selects the lowest numbered channel for horizontal scaling and triggering Vertically all channels in use are individually scaled If you use autoset when no channels are displayed the digitizing oscilloscope turns on channel one CH 1 and scales it Table 3 4 lists the autoset defaults Table 3 4 Autoset Defaults Control Changed by Autoset to Acquire Mode Sample Acquire Repetitive Signal On TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 111 Setting up Automatically Autoset and Reset Reset the Oscilloscope 3 112
135. ating to 40 000 ft 12190 m Emissions23 Meets or exceeds the requirements of the following standards Vfg 243 1991 Amended per Vfg 46 1992 FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A EN50081 1 European Community Requirements EN55022 Radiated Emissions Class B EN55022 Conducted Emissions Class B With Option 3P VDE 0871 Category B Vfg 1046 1984 FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15 Subpart B Class A TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 15 Appendix B Specification Table B 14 Warranted Characteristics Environmental Safety and Reliability Cont Name Description Susceptibility Meets or exceeds the requirements of the following standards EN50082 1 European Community Requirements IEC 801 3 Radiated Susceptibility 3 V meter from 27 MHz to 500 MHz unmodulated Performance Criteria lt 0 2 division waveform displacement or lt 0 4 division increase in p p noise when the oscilloscope is Subjected to the EMI specified in the standard IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria B Option 3P The printer can withstand up to 5 kV with no change to settings or impairment of normal operations or up to 9 kV with no damage that prevents recovery of normal operations Dynamics Random vibration 0 31 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis operating 2 46 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis non operating Third Party Certification Conforms to and is certified where appropriate to
136. ats see Supported Formats page 3 35 to give you a wide choice of hardcopy devices It also makes it easier for you to place oscilloscope screen copies into a desktop publishing system However since the digitizing oscilloscope has only a GPIB interface port and many hardcopy devices have only RS 232 or Centronics ports you need a connection strategy for sending the hardcopy data from the digitizing oscillo scope to the printer or plotter Three such strategies exist NOTE If your oscilloscope is equipped with Option 13 your oscilloscope has an RS 232 port and a Centronics port in addition to the GPIB port See the TDS Family Option 13 Instruction Manual for setting up to hardcopy directly through the RS 232 and Centronics ports m Use a printer plotter with a GPIB connector m Use a GPIB to Centronics or GPIB to RS 232 converter box m Send the data to a computer with both GPIB and RS 232 or Centronics ports NOTE If your oscilloscope is equipped with Option IF your oscilloscope has a floppy disk file system With the file system you can also send the data to a floppy disk file for later printing from a computer capable of reading the MS DOS compatible floppy disk Using a GPIB based Hardcopy Device You can connect the digitizing oscilloscope directly to a GPIB based hardcopy device see Figure 3 20 An example of a GPIB hardcopy device is the Tektronix HC100 Plotter Using a GPIB to Centronics or GPIB to RS 232 Con
137. bs control only one channel at a time the vertical controls are now set to adjust channel 2 m The trigger readout still indicates that the trigger is detecting trigger events on Chl The trigger source is not changed simply by adding a channel You can change the trigger source by using the TRIGGER MENU button to display the trigger menu 5 Turn the vertical POSITION knob clockwise to move the channel 2 waveform up on the graticule Notice that the channel reference indicator for channel 2 moves with the waveform 6 Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main The VERTICAL MENU button displays a menu that gives you control over many vertical channel parameters Figure 2 12 Although there can be more than one channel displayed the vertical menu and buttons only adjust the selected channel Each menu item in the Vertical menu displays a side menu Right now the Coupling item in the main menu is highlighted which means that the side menu shows the coupling choices At the top of the side menu the menu title shows the channel affected by the menu choices The menu title always matches the lighted channel button 7 Press Q side to toggle the selection to 50 Q this changes the input coupling of channel 2 from 1 MQ to 50 Q The channel readout for channel 2 near the bottom of the graticule now shows an Q indicator TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 21 Tutorial Tek Run 100KS7s Sample Impedance BIR 50
138. cal Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu 2 22 Figure 2 13 The Menus After Changing Channels 2 23 Figure 2 14 Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement Side Men 2 3 20 en 2 24 Figure 2 15 Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts 2 26 Figure 2 16 General Purpose Knob Indicators 2 26 Figure 2 17 Snapshot of Channel 1 0 cece eee eeee 2 28 Figure 2 18 Save Recall Setup Menu cece eee wees 2 30 Figure 2 19 Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays 2 31 Figure 2 20 Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering 2 33 Figure 2 21 Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger 2 35 Figure 2 22 TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights 2 36 Figure 2 23 Example Trigger Readouts c2ccccceesccren 2 37 Figure 2 24 Record View Trigger Position and Trigger Level Bar Readoults u Sie a Ba rn En Bene E 2 38 Figure 2 25 Acquisition Input Analog Signal Sample and Digitize u wee ere aes wee aie Rie od Ses Se eee ae 2 39 Figure 2 26 Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used 2 39 Figure 2 27 Real Time Sampling cece cece eens 2 40 Figure 2 28 Equivalent Time Sampling eeeee 2 41 Figure 2 29 Scaling and Positioning ccccecseceees 2 43 Figure 2 30 Aliasing ccc ccc c cece cece cece eee eeeees 2 45 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual iii Table of Conten
139. calling Setups See To Delete All Setups and Waveforms on page 3 99 3 102 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Saving and Recalling Waveforms To Display a Saved Waveform To display a waveform in internal reference memory Press MORE gt Refl Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 main Note that in Figure 3 48 the main menu items Ref2 Ref3 and Ref4 appear shaded while Refl does not References that are empty appear shaded in the More main menu Tek Run 100KS s Sample Math Change Math waveform definition ch 100mv q M 500us chi 20m Math2 Math3 B ag Kea T ch2 FET CH maths Refl Reiz Reta Reid CIC O O Oloa SB laS Figure 3 48 More Menu To Recall a Waveform From Disk To recall a waveform from disk to an internal reference memory press save re call WAVEFORM gt Recall Wfm To Ref Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Only files with WFM extensions are displayed Finally press from the side menu To Refl To Ref2 To Ref3 or To Ref4 choices to complete the operation To Run the File Utilities To run file utilities see File System on page 3 31 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 103 Saving and Recalling Waveforms To Select the Save Format To select the format that the oscilloscope uses to save waveforms
140. cece cece eee eeeees 3 25 Table 3 3 Measurement Definitions cccceeeeeeees 3 59 Table 3 4 Autoset Defaults cece ccc cece e cece eeeees 3 111 Table 3 5 Zoom Defaults cc ccc wee c cece ener eeeeens 3 139 Table A 1 International Power Cords ccceceeceees A 2 Table A 2 Standard Accessories cccccceccccscscceces A 4 Table A 3 Probe Accessories ccc cee c cece cece eee eeeees A 4 Table A 4 Optional Accessories 0 0c cece cece reece eeee A 5 Table A 5 Probe Accessories cece eee c cece ce eceeesens A 6 Table A 6 Accessory Software ccc ccc cc ccc ccecscceces A 8 Table B 1 Key Features of the TDS 400A Oscilloscopes B 1 Table B 2 Nominal Traits Signal Acquisition System B 3 Table B 3 Nominal Traits Time Base System B 5 Table B 4 Nominal Traits Triggering System B 5 Table B 5 Nominal Traits Display System 6 B 6 Table B 6 Nominal Traits Data Storage 0008 B 6 Table B 7 Nominal Traits GPIB Interface Video Output and Power FUSE na sen nr en nenn B 6 Table B 8 Nominal Traits Mechanical ccccccccc000 B 7 Table B 9 Warranted Characteristics Signal Acquisition System B 11 Table B 10 Warranted Characteristics Time Base System B 13 Table B 11 Warranted Characteristics Triggering System B 14 Table B 12 Warrant
141. cope Understanding the basic concepts of your digitizing oscilloscope helps you use it much more effectively At a Glance quickly shows you how the oscilloscope is organized and gives some very general operating instructions It also contains an overview of all the main menus and the following maps Front Panel Map Rear Panel Map Display Map Basic Menu Operation Menu Map The Tutorial contains tutorial examples and explains basic system concepts Setting Up for the Examples explains how to set up the digitizing oscillo scope to use the examples Example 1 Displaying a Waveform teaches you how to reset the digitizing oscilloscope display and adjust waveforms and use the autoset function Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms explains how to add control and delete multiple waveforms Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements introduces you to the automated measurement system Example 4 Saving Setups discusses saving and recalling the digitizing oscilloscope setups Triggering explains how to set the triggers to convert unstable displays or blank screens into meaningful waveforms Acquisition explains converting analog data into digital data Scaling and Positioning Waveforms explains how to change the position and displayed size of waveforms Measurements explains using automated cursor and graticule measurements to display numeric information on the displayed waveforms To explore these topics in more depth
142. cope displays main menus along the bottom of the screen Figure 2 3 shows the Setup main menu Menu Item and Button Recall Factory Setup M 100ns Chi f 28m Factory Init Menu Item and Button 2 14 Figure 2 3 The Displayed Setup Menu 2 Press the button directly below the Recall Factory Setup menu item The display shows side menus along the right side of the screen The buttons to select these side menu items are to the right of the side menu Because an accidental instrument reset could destroy a setup that took a long time to create the digitizing oscilloscope asks you to verify the Recall Factory Setup selection see Figure 2 3 3 Press the button to the right ofthe OK Confirm Factory Init side menu item TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial NOTE This manual uses the following notation to represent the sequence of selections you made in steps 1 2 and 3 Press save recall SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side D Note that a clock icon appears on screen The oscilloscope displays this icon when performing operations that take longer than several seconds 4 Press SET LEVEL TO 50 see Figure 2 4 to be sure the oscilloscope triggers on the input signal A TRIGGER En MAIN LEVEL DELAYED TRIG TRIGGER MENU SET LEVEL TRIG D TO 50 O g SET LEVEL TO 50 Button gt
143. cquire a waveform record unless a valid trigger event occurs It waits for a valid trigger event before acquiring waveform data Oscilloscope An instrument for making a graph of two factors These are typically voltage versus time Peak Detect acquisition mode A mode in which the oscilloscope saves the minimum and maximum samples over two adjacent acquisition intervals For many glitch free signals that mode is indistinguishable from sample mode Peak detect mode works with real time non interpolation sampling only Peak to peak Amplitude voltage measurement of the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude Period A timing measurement of the time covered by one complete signal cycle It is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds Phase A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or lags the other in time Phase is expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one complete cycle of one of the waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other Pixel A visible point on the display The oscilloscope display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Pop up menu A sub menu of a main menu Pop up menus temporarily occupy part of the waveform display area and are used to present additional choices associated TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary with the main menu s
144. cquisition of the waveform record Two important factors are ground lead inductance introduced by the probe and the physical layout of your circuit and component devices Ground Lead Inductance For an amplitude measurement to be meaningful you must give the measure ment a point of reference The probe offers you the capability of referencing the voltage at its tip to ground To make your measurement as accurate as possible connect the probe ground lead to the ground reference However when you touch your probe tip to a circuit you are introducing new resistance capacitance and inductance into the circuit Figure 3 33 Probe Reource Tip Inductance Lt Wenn G Probe L Probe ee Rn oma gt T 10 0 pF fYYY Ground Lead Inductance Lg Figure 3 33 A Probe Adds Resistance Capacitance and Inductance For most circuits the high input resistance of a passive probe has a negligible effect on the signal The series inductances represented by the probe tip and ground lead however can result in a parasitic resonant circuit that may ring within the bandwidth of the oscilloscope Figure 3 34 shows the effect of the same signal through the same probe with different ground leads If the frequency of the induced ringing is beyond the bandwidth of the oscillo scope ringing and rise time degradation may be hidden If you know the self inductance L and capacitance C of your probe and ground lead you can calculate
145. cription Video Display Resolution 640 pixels horizontally by 480 pixels vertically in a display area of 5 04 inches horizontally by 3 78 inches vertically Waveform Display Graticule A single graticule 401 x 501 pixels 8 x 10 divisions with divisions that are 1 cm by 1cm Waveform Display Grey Scale 16 levels in variable persistence display style Table B 6 Nominal Traits Data Storage Name Description Capacity Nonvolatile Waveform Memory Total capacity is 120 000 points one to four waveforms acquired with any combination of record lengths that add up to 120 000 points For available record lengths see Record Length Selection on page B 5 of this chapter Capacity Nonvolatile Setup Memory Ten setups Batteries Required Two lithium poly carbon monofluoride Both are type BR2 3A UL listed Both are rated at 3 0 volt 1 2 amp hour 1 Batteries are not accessible from the outside of the instrument therefore a service technician must replace them Table B 7 Nominal Traits GPIB Interface Video Output and Power Fuse Name Description Interface GPIB GPIB interface complies with IEEE Std 488 1 1987 and IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Interface RS 232 Option 13 only RS 232 interface complies with EIA TIA 574 Interface Centronics Option 13 only Su interface complies with Centronics interface standard C332 44 Feb 1977 Power Supply Printer Option 13 only Supply Voltage 6 5 VDC Maximum Current 2 Amps DC cont
146. d below midpoint of a waveform It attempts to ignore ringing and spikes when determining the 0 and 100 levels This method works well when measuring square waves and pulse waveforms TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 1 Appendix C Algorithms HighRef MidRef LowRef C 2 Mid2Ref Other Variables The oscilloscope calculates the histogram based High and Low values as follows 1 It makes a histogram of the record with one bin for each digitizing level 256 total 2 It splits the histogram into two sections at the halfway point between Min and Max also called Mid 3 The level with the most points in the upper histogram is the High value and the level with the most points in the lower histogram is the Low value Choose the levels where the histograms peak for High and Low If Mid gives the largest peak value within the upper or lower histogram then return the Mid value for both High and Low this is probably a very low amplitude waveform If more than one histogram level bin has the maximum value choose the bin farthest from Mid This algorithm does not work well for two level waveforms with greater than about 100 overshoot The user sets the various reference levels through the Reference Level selection in the Measure menu They include the following HighRef the waveform high reference level Used in fall time and rise time calculations Typically set to 90 You can set it from 0
147. d markers that you use to make measurements between two waveform locations The oscilloscope displays the values expressed in volts or time of the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors Cycle area A measurement of waveform area taken over one cycle Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Cycle mean An amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over one cycle TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary RR Cycle RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle DC DC coupling A mode that passes both AC and DC signal components to the circuit Available for both the trigger system and the vertical system Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing Display system The part of the oscilloscope that shows waveforms measurements menu items status and other parameters Edge Trigger Triggering occurs when the oscilloscope detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope
148. d waveform typically volts See Figure 3 30 Use the general purpose knob to enter the values is the default selection It is useful for general purpose applications Units is helpful for setting precise values For example if you are measuring specifications on an RS 232 C circuit set the levels precisely to RS 232 C specification voltage values by defining the high and low references in units 2 Press High Ref Mid Ref Low Ref or Mid2 Ref side High Ref sets the high reference level The default is 90 Mid Ref sets the middle reference level The default is 50 Low Ref sets the low reference level The default is 10 mS Mid2 Ref sets the middle reference level used on the second waveform specified in Delay or Phase Measurements The default is 50 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 65 Measuring Waveforms Tek Run 100KS s 5 Set Levels in E units Reference Levels chi Ampi BEREIT 304 in TS Ol 2oomv l TO M 500s Chi i 108mv Mid2 Ref 530 ne Tr 5 i Remove Gating l Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot forech Measrmnt OFF Histagram Levels O Ololololololo Figure 3 30 Measure Menu Reference Levels Take a Delay The delay measurement lets you measure from an edge on the selected waveform Measurement to an edge on another waveform To make a delay measurement d
149. de Press more side to see all of these format choices 3 Press SHIFT HARDCOPY MENU gt Layout main gt Landscape or Portrait side see Figure 3 18 Landscape Format Portrait Format Figure 3 18 Hardcopy Formats 4 Press SHIFT HARDCOPY MENU gt Port main to specify the output channel to send your hardcopy through Unless your oscilloscope is equipped with Option 13 or Option IF the only choice is GPIB If your oscilloscope is equipped with Option 13 see the TDS Family Option 13 Instruction Manual for setting up hardcopy over the RS 232 and Centronics ports If your oscilloscope is equipped with Option IF you may also select File to send your hardcopy to a floppy disk See 70 Save to a Floppy Disk on page 3 40 To Date Time Stamp Your You can display the current date and time on screen so that it appears on the Hardcopy hardcopies you print To date and time stamp your hardcopy do the following steps 1 Press DISPLAY Readout Options main gt Display Date and Time side to toggle the setting to On 2 The date and time are backed up by a battery and need not be set each time you power up the oscilloscope If the date and time are not set a message instructing you to do so is displayed If that is the case skip steps 3 and 4 and continue with step 1 of 70 Set the Date and Time below Then redo this procedure 3 Press Clear Menu to remove the menu from the display so the date and time can be displayed See
150. determine the settings of some of key trigger parameters check the Trigger readout at the bottom of the display see Figure 2 23 The readouts are different for edge and video triggers Main Trigger Main Trigger Slope Rising Edge Source Ch1 Main Time Base Time Div Main Trigger Main Time Base Level Toom Source chi TYPE amp Edge gt Holdoff Ololololololo Figure 2 23 Example Trigger Readouts Record View To determine where the trigger point is located in the waveform record and with respect to the display check the record view at the top of the display see Figure 2 24 Trigger Position and Level Indicators To see the trigger point and level on the waveform display check the graphic indicators of trigger position and level which you can optionally display Figure 2 24 shows the trigger position indicator and the short style trigger level bar Both the trigger position indicator and the trigger level bars are displayed from the Display menu See Set Display Readout Options on page 3 22 for more information TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 37 Tutorial Trigger Position Relative to the Display and Waveform Record Trigger Point Indicator Indicating the Trigger Position on the Waveform Record Trigger Bar Indicating the Trigger 2 38 Level on the Waveform Record For More Information
151. e ET sampling the oscilloscope acquires samples over many repetitions of the event see Figure 2 28 It should only be used on repetitive signals eee Pe ea TE Ist Acquisition Cycle JO ST S 3rd Acquisition Cycle S L nth Acquisition Cycle o Sl Figure 2 28 Equivalent Time Sampling 2nd Acquisition Cycle The oscilloscope takes a few samples with each trigger event and eventually construct a waveform record using the samples from multiple acquisitions Equivalent time sampling lets you accurately acquire signals with frequencies much higher than the digitizing oscilloscope real time bandwidth The digitizing oscilloscope uses a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger That is because the oscilloscope sample clock runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The oscilloscope takes samples independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 41 Tutorial Acquisition Modes Bandwidth Coupling DC ACM GND For More Information 2 42 The digitizing oscilloscope supports five acquisition modes m Sample m Peak Detect m Hi Res m Envelope m Average Sample acquisition mode which acquires in real time is the mode most commonly used
152. e Description Lower Frequency Limit AC lt 10 Hz when AC 1 MQ coupled lt 200 kHz when AC 50 Q coupled Coupled 1 See Analog Bandwidth on page B 17 for the typical analog bandwidth with the standard accessary probe 2 Net Offset Offset Position x Volts Div Net Offset is the voltage level at the center of the A D converter dynamic range Offset Accuracy is the accuracy of this voltage level 3 The samples must be acquired under the same setup and ambient conditions 4 DC Gain Accuracy is confirmed in the Performance Verification Procedure by passing the checks for Offset Accuracy and DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy Averaged 5 Position Accuracy is confirmed in the Performance Verification Procedure by passing the checks for Offset Accuracy and DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy Averaged 6 The limits given are for the ambient temperature range of 0 C to 30 C Reduce the upper bandwidth frequencies by 2 5 MHz for each C above 30 C 7 The AC Coupled Lower Frequency Limits are reduced by a factor of 10 when 10X passive probes are used Table B 10 Warranted Characteristics Time Base System Name Description Accuracy Long Term Sample Rate and Delay Time 150 ppm over any gt 1 ms interval Accuracy Absolute Time and Delay Time For single shot acquisitions using sample or high resolution acquisition modes and a Measurements 2 bandwidth limit setting of 100 MHz 1 WI 150 ppm of Reading 450 ps
153. e Figure 2 8 and observe the stable waveform display ME TRIGGER Im MAIN LEVEL MAIN LEVEL Knob DELAYED TRIG TRIGGER MENU SETLEVEL TRIG D 50 TO SINGLETRIG ARM FORCE TRIG Figure 2 7 TRIGGER Controls APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE MENU MEASURE HARDCOPY RUN STOP ee UTILITY CURSOR DISPLAY SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM i AUTOSET Button STATUS Figure 2 8 AUTOSET Button Location 2 18 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Figure 2 9 shows the display after pressing AUTOSET If necessary you can adjust the waveform using the knobs discussed earlier in this example Tek Run 100KS s Sample Recall Factory 200mV M 500us Chi f 280mV OK j 7 Confirm om er oa Pa sah PIETEN RN ses ote Fon Factory Init ER Recal ave Recall File Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setup Setu Ololololololo Figure 2 9 The Display After Pressing Autoset NOTE If the corners on your displayed signal look rounded or pointed see Figure 2 10 then you may need to compensate your probe The Probe Compensation section on page 3 81 explains how to compensate your probe le ea Figure 2 10 Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 19 Tutorial Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms 2 20 Adding a Waveform
154. e created more than one template you can compare one channel to one template and the other channel to another template To Specify the Limit Test Now specify the action to take if waveform data exceeds the limits set by the Response limit test template TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 55 Limit Testing 3 56 Single Waveform Comparisons Multiple Waveform Comparisons 1 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Limit Test Setup main to bring up a side menu of possible actions 2 Ensure that the side button corresponding to the desired action reads ON m If you want to send a hardcopy command when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Hardcopy if Condition Met side to ON Do not forget to set up the hardcopy system See Hardcopy on page 3 35 for details m If you want the bell to ring when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Ring Bell if Condition Met side to ON m If you want the digitizing oscilloscope to stop when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Stop After Limit Test Condition Met side to ON NOTE The button labeled Stop After Limit Test Condition Met corresponds to the Limit Test Condition Met menu item in the Stop After main menu You can turn this button on in the Limit Test Setup menu but you cannot turn it off In order to turn it off press Stop After and specify one of the other choices in the Stop After side menu Now that you have set the oscilloscope up for li
155. e display it does not freeze as it would in normal trigger mode Monitoring of a power supply output is an example of such an application TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Normal and auto trigger modes also affect roll mode operation If roll mode is activated while in Normal trigger mode the roll mode is triggered If roll mode is activated while in Auto trigger mode the roll mode is untriggered See Roll Mode on page 3 93 for more information Trigger Holdoff When the oscilloscope recognizes a trigger event it disables the trigger system until acquisition is complete In addition the trigger system remains disabled during the holdoff period that follows each acquisition You can set holdoff time to help ensure a stable display For example the trigger signal can be a complex waveform with many possible trigger points on it Though the waveform is repetitive a simple trigger might get you a series of patterns on the screen instead of the same pattern each time Digital pulse trains are good examples of complex waveforms see Figure 2 20 Each pulse looks like any other so many possible trigger points exist Not all of these result in the same display The holdoff period allows the digitizing oscilloscope to trigger on the correct edge resulting in a stable display Holdoff is settable from 0 minimum holdoff available to 100 maximum available To see how to set holdoff see 70 Set Mode amp Holdof
156. e oscilloscope recognizes and acts upon FORCE TRIG even when you press it before the end of pretrigger holdoff However the button has no effect if the acquisition system is stopped To Single Trigger To trigger on the next valid trigger event and then stop press SHIFT FORCE TRIG Now press the RUN STOP button each time you want to initiate a single sequence of acquisitions To ascertain the state and setup of the triggering circuit use the trigger status lights readout and screen Trigger Status Lights To determine the trigger status check the TRIG D READY and ARM status lights in the Trigger control area see Figure 2 22 m When TRIG D is lighted it means the digitizing oscilloscope has recognized a valid trigger and is filling the posttrigger portion of the waveform m When READY is lighted it means the digitizing oscilloscope can accept a valid trigger event and it is waiting for that event to occur TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial m When ARM is lighted it means the trigger circuitry is filling the pretrigger portion of the waveform record m When both TRIG D and READY are lighted it means the digitizing oscilloscope has recognized a valid main trigger and is waiting for a delayed trigger When it recognizes a delayed trigger it will fill in the posttrigger portion of the delayed waveform m When ARM TRIG D and READY are all off the digitizer is stopped Trigger Readout To
157. e range available with offset can prove valuable as you try to move and scale the ripple to meet your needs Adjusting the horizontal position of waveforms moves them right or left on the display That is useful when the record length of the waveform is so large greater than 500 points that the digitizing oscilloscope cannot display the entire waveform record at one time You can also adjust the scale of the waveform For example you might want to see just one cycle of a waveform to measure the overshoot on its rising edge NOTE If external clock is enabled and zoom is disabled the Horizontal SCALE knob has no affect To adjust the horizontal scale of the displayed waveform records turn the horizontal SCALE knob To adjust the horizontal position turn the horizontal POSITION knob The digitizing oscilloscope shows the actual scale in the bottom right of the display The scale readout shows the time per division used Since all live waveforms use the same time base the digitizing oscilloscope only displays one value for all the active channels TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Aliasing When a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than the actual waveform being input or it appears unstable even though the light next to TRIG D is illuminated Aliasing occurs because the oscilloscope cannot sample the signal fast enough to construct an accurate waveform record see Figure 2 3
158. e waits the user specified time then waits for the next delayed trigger event and then acquires After Events waits for the specified number of delayed trigger events and then acquires External clks waits for the specified number of external clocks and then acquires TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 13 Delayed Triggering To Run After Delay 3 14 The digitizing oscilloscope is always acquiring samples to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record When and if delay criteria are met it takes enough posttrigger samples to complete the delayed waveform record and then displays it Refer to Figure 3 7 for a more detailed look at how delayed records are placed in time relative to the main trigger You use the Horizontal menu to select and define either delayed runs after main or delayed triggerable Delayed triggerable however requires further selections in the Delayed Trigger menu Do the following steps to set the delayed time base to run immediately after delay 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Time Base main gt Delayed Only side gt Delayed Runs After Main side 2 Use the general purpose knob to set the delay time If you press Intensified side you display an intensified zone on the main timebase record that shows where the delayed timebase record occurs relative to the main trigger For Delayed Runs After Main mode the start of the intensified zone corresponds to the start of the delayed timeb
159. eate a new directory press the side menu Create Directory button The labelling menu appears Turn the general purpose knob or use the main menu arrow keys to select each letter Press Enter Char from the main menu to enter each letter When you have entered the name press the side menu OK Accept item See Figure 3 16 To turn on or off the confirm delete message toggle the side menu Confirm Delete button When the confirm delete option is OFF the digitizing oscilloscope can immedi ately delete files or directories When the confirm option is ON the digitizing oscilloscope warns you before it deletes files and gives you a chance to reconsider To turn on or off the file overwrite lock toggle the side menu Overwrite Lock button When overwrite lock is on the digitizing oscilloscope will not permit you to write over an existing file of the same name An important reason to allow overwriting is to let you write files using a target file name that contains wild card characters This means the digitizing oscilloscope creates sequential files whose names are similar except for the sequential numbers that go in the real name in the place of the question marks To format a 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte disk turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the drive to format in fd0 Then press the side menu Format button See Hardcopy on page 3 35 See Saving and Recalling Setups on page 3 97 See
160. ed Characteristics Probe Compensator Output cece cee cece cece erence nenne B 14 Table B 13 Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements B 14 Table B 14 Warranted Characteristics Environmental Safety and Reliability 4 en nenn B 15 Table B 15 Typical Characteristics Signal Acquisition System B 17 Table B 16 Typical Characteristics Time Base System B 18 Table B 17 Typical Characteristics Triggering System B 19 Table B 18 Typical Characteristics Data Handling B 20 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual vii Table of Contents viii Table E 1 Factory Initialization Defaults sssssssssee E 1 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual CE General Safety Summary Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord Avoid Electric Overload Ground the Product Do Not Operate Without Covers Use Proper Fuse Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
161. ed over the entire waveform or gated region Age Mean Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region AI Minimum Voltage measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage on Measured over the entire waveform or gated region t_ Negative Duty Cycle Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative Width Period meee NegativeDutyCycle Negative Overshoot Voltage measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region _ Low Min 5 NegativeOvershoot Amplitude x 100 Negative Width Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidR ef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse Peak to Peak Voltage measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region Period Timing measurement Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to happen in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds IQA Phase Timing measurement The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time Expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one waveform cycle T Positive Duty Cycle Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the positive pulse width to
162. el power connector see Figure 1 1 for the connector location to the power system TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 1 3 Start Up 1 4 Power On Power Connector Fuse Principal Power Switch Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up Table 1 1 Fuse and Fuse Cap Part Numbers Fuse Fuse Part Number Fuse Cap Part Number 25 inch x 1 25 inch UL 198 6 3AG 5 159 0014 00 200 2264 00 A FAST 250 V 5 mm x 20 mm IEC 127 4A T 159 0255 00 200 2265 00 250 V 1 Check that the rear panel principal power switch is on see Figure 1 1 for the location of the switch The principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument 2 If the oscilloscope is not powered on the screen is blank push the front panel ON STBY button to toggle it on Figure 1 2 The ON STBY button controls power to most of the instrument circuits power continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is set to STBY Once the digitizing oscilloscope is installed you can leave the principal power switch on and use the ON STBY button TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Start Up Tektronix TDS 460A RAA Siuo fonse a Tek Run ey Sample Tektronix A TDS 420A Digitizing Oscilloscope Version
163. election You can cycle through the options in a pop up menu by repeatedly pressing the main menu button underneath the pop up Positive duty cycle A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive overshoot Amplitude voltage measurement Max High x 100 PositiveOvershoot Amplitude Positive width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points rising edge MidRef default 50 and falling edge MidRef default 50 on a positive pulse Posttrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired after the trigger event Pretrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired before the trigger event Probe An oscilloscope input device Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that was sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Probe compensation Adjustment that improves the low frequency response of a probe Real time sampling A sampling mode where the digitizing oscilloscope samples fast enough to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event Use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Reference memory Memory in a oscilloscope used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The digitizing oscilloscope saves t
164. en and how long to acquire record points Select button A button that changes which of the two cursors is active Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion and display ofthe waveform Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger on edge mode Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The oscilloscope displays the value of the active move able cursor with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Waveform The shape or form visible representation of a signal Waveform interval The time interval between record points as displayed XY format A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records point by point It is useful for studying phase relationships between two waveforms YT format The conventional oscilloscope display format It shows the voltage of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary Glossary 10 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Index Numbers 1 Base Cursor menu 3 119 1 Clocks Cursor menu 3 119 1 seconds Hz Cursor menu 3 119 100 MHz Vertical menu 3 123 20 MHz Vertical menu 3 123 A AC coupling 2 34 Glossary 1 AC line voltage trigger input 2 31 AC Main Trigge
165. ent of those math waveforms that are not of time frequency or voltage is described in Waveform Math which begins on page 3 131 For those oscilloscopes equipped with Option 2F the advanced DSP math option the instruction manual shipped with the option describes the use of cursors to measure such waveforms and the measurement units that result Cursor Modes There are two cursor modes independent and tracking see Figure 3 54 In independent mode you move only one cursor at a time using the general purpose knob The active or selected cursor is a solid line Press SELECT to change which cursor is selected In tracking mode you normally move both cursors in tandem using the general purpose knob The two cursors remain a fixed distance time or voltage from each other Press SELECT to temporarily suspend cursor tracking You can then use the general purpose knob to adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor A second push toggles the cursors back to tracking Independent Mode Tracking Mode ee _ Only Selected Cursor Moves Both Cursors Move in Tandem Figure 3 54 Cursor Modes Cursor Readouts The cursor readout shows the absolute location of the selected cursor and the difference between the selected and non selected cursor The readouts differ depending on whether you are using H Bars V Bars or Paired H Bars The value after A shows the voltage difference between the cursors The value
166. enu lets you select which input is the delayed trigger source On the TDS 420A and TDS 460A press Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side On the TDS 410A press Ch1 or Ch2 side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Delayed Triggering Tek Run 200MS s ET Delay by Time 36015 Delayed Edge Delay riggerable u after Time GE ne Events External Clock Time Oloo aW gt 00mV M 500ns Chi 260mY vents h E t a 3 4 A D 250ns Chi 270mV i Source Coupling Slope Level chi DE T 270mV Ololololololo Figure 3 8 Delayed Trigger Menu 5 Press Coupling main gt DC AC HF Rej LF Rej or Noise Rej side to define how the input signal is coupled to the delayed trigger For descriptions of these coupling types see Triggering on page 2 31 6 Press Slope main to select the slope that the delayed trigger occurs on Choose between the rising edge and falling edge slopes When using Delayed Triggerable mode to acquire waveforms two trigger bars are displayed One trigger bar indicates the level set by the main trigger system the other indicates the level set by the delayed trigger system 7 Press Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side Level lets you enter the delayed trigger level using the general purpose knob Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V
167. eo See Figure 3 58 To Change Vertical Parameters Use the Vertical menu see Figure 3 58 to select the coupling bandwidth and offset for the selected waveform This menu also lets you numerically change the position or scale instead of using the vertical knobs TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 121 Vertical Control 3 122 Vertical Readout Coupling DC ACM GND Bandwidth Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Impedance 1M EI Ch Coupling Impedance oOloldaolaold 50 0mVvd MS0 0us Chir EA 5 5 i 3 7M Benne candwidth Hne Scale position offset Full soomV asamdiv au Ololololololo Figure 3 58 Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu To choose the type of coupling for attaching the input signal to the vertical attenuator for the selected channel and to set its input impedance Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main gt DC AC GND or Q side DC coupling shows both the AC and DC components of an input signal AC coupling shows only the alternating components of an input signal GND ground coupling disconnects the input signal from the acquisition Q input impedance lets you select either 1 MQ or 50 Q impedance NOTE If you select 50 Q impedance with AC coupling the digitizing oscillo scope will not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz Also when you connect an
168. er is omitted if there is only one step When steps require that you make a sequence of selections using front panel controls and menu buttons an arrow _ marks each transition between a front panel button and a menu or between menus Also whether a name is a main menu or side menu item is clearly indicated Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main gt DC side gt Bandwidth main gt 100 MHz side Using the convention just described results in instructions that are graphical ly intuitive and simplifies procedures For example the instruction just given replaces these five steps 1 Press the front panel button VERTICAL MENU Press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu button DC E ye Y Press the main menu button Bandwidth 5 Press the side menu button 100 MHz Sometimes you may have to make a selection from a pop up menu Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up In this example you repeatedly press the main menu button Type until Edge is highlighted in the pop up menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Product Description l 00 j0 0 moa cre cae O00 O 00 000000I0 Your Tektronix digitizing oscilloscope is a superb tool for acquiring displaying a
169. es of lasers LEDs electro optic modulators and flashlamps You can also use these probes in the development manufacturing and maintenance of fiber optic control networks local area networks LANs fiber based systems based on the FDDI and SONET standard optical disk devices and high speed fiber optic communications systems TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Selection NOTE When you connect an optical probe to the oscilloscope the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a high input resistance passive probe you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ Vertical Control on page 3 121 explains how to change the input impedance Time to Voltage Converter The instantaneous time interval to voltage converter TVC continuously converts consecutive timing measurements to a time interval versus time waveform Timing variations typically appear as left to right motion or jitter on an oscilloscope Time base or trigger holdoff adjustments may improve display stability but they do not show timing dynamics The TVC untangles the often confusing waveforms and delivers a coherent real time view The TVC adds three measurement functions to the voltage versus time capability of your oscilloscope time delay versus time pulse width versus time and period versus time TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 87 Probe Selection 3 88 TDS 410A TDS 420
170. et press VERTICAL MENU gt Offset main Then use the general purpose knob to set the vertical offset If you want to reset the offset to zero press Set to 0 V side For More Information See Acquisition on page 2 39 See Scaling and Positioning Waveforms on page 2 43 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 123 Vertical Control 3 124 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual SS ae Video Triggering The optional Video Trigger menu gives you a variety of selections for triggering on a video signal A video trigger event occurs when a video signal generates a horizontal or vertical sync pulse For more information see Triggering on page 2 31 To Select Video Triggering The Video Trigger menu lets you select the source polarity class mode and holdoff It also gives you the option to delay by lines or time and lets you trigger on the first field second field or both To bring up the Video Trigger menu Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Video side see Figure 3 15 Tek Run Be Sample 100 Edge nc elay ode TYPE Gass Source polarity Mode z lt Video gt lt NTSC gt Negative tines Holdoff LO C O C C OC m CIO O O Figure 3 59 Main Trigger Menu Video Type TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 125 Video Triggering To
171. external clock frequency divided by Hertz For example ifthe displayed cursor frequency is 500 Hz and the external clock frequency is 2 kHz 500 Hz x 1 0 MHz 2 kHz Hz To Acquire a waveform Using an External Clock A disk drive turbine and a punch press all have parts that move or turn Their behavior is often best observed using an external Clock By using a Tachometer or a Optical Encoder you can precisely convert the revolution or travel of the systems into electric pulses By using an external clock you can see the angle or position at which events occur As the system speed changes the display shows each event at the same position on the screen the displayed waveform will not stretch or compress with system speed changes as it would using the internal clock In external clock mode you can still trigger the oscilloscope to cause the acquired waveforms to lock to a certain position of an encoder which is providing the external clock For example some encoders provide a trigger out signal Another example of a signal that you could use as a trigger is the sector 0 signal in acomputer hard disk observing the acquired waveform the trigger T shows where in the record the hard disk returns to sector 0 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 49 Horizontal Control 3 50 To acquire a waveform using an external clock NOTE In Hi Res mode the frequency of the external clock signal must be less than or eq
172. f on page 3 29 The minimum and maximum holdoff varies with the horizontal scale See Holdoff Variable Main Trigger on page B 19 of Appendix B for the typical minimum and maximum values Acquisition Acquisition Interval Interval Trigger Level AI fF M M NMN MN 1 717 Trigger Points yY NM yY Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Triggers are not recognized during holdoff time Figure 2 20 Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 33 Tutorial DC ACO A 2 34 Trigger Coupling Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit Available coupling types include AC DC Low Frequency Rejection High Frequency Rejection and Noise Rejection DC coupling passes all of the input signal In other words it passes both AC and DC components to the trigger circuit AC coupling passes only the alternating components of an input signal AC components above 10 Hz are passed if the source channel is in 1 MQ coupling components above 200 kHz are passed in 50 Q coupling It removes the DC components from the trigger signal High frequency rejection coupling removes the high frequency portion of the triggering signal That allows only the low frequency components to pass on to the triggering system to start an acquisition High frequency rejection attenuates signals above 30 kHz Low frequency rejection coupling removes the low frequency p
173. fields the even fields or all Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Scan main gt Odd Even or All side see Figure 3 62 If you choose Odd the digitizing oscilloscope always triggers on the start of the odd field in an interlaced frame If you choose Even the digitizing oscilloscope always triggers on the first line of the even field in an interlaced frame If you choose All the digitizing oscilloscope alternates between triggering on the start of the odd and even fields a Tek Run neous Sample 100 BE Even All ne elay ode TYPE Class lies polarity Mode re a lt Video gt lt NTSC gt Negative tines Holdoff Ololololololo Oloo Figure 3 62 Video Trigger Scan Parameter 3 128 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Video Triggering To Set the Scan Rate amp If you select Custom in the Class menu the Scan Rate amp Interlace option lists Interlace Mode several frequency range options see Figure 3 63 The options are Scan Period 15 625 us 66 667 us Rate 1 15 20 kHz Rate 2 20 25 kHz Rate 3 25 35 kHz and Rate 4 35 64 kHz Precise setting of the Scan Period is only required ifthe video class is Custom and you use video line cursors however adjusting the period using the general purpose knob also selects the appropriate scan rate Also choosing a scan rate incom
174. forms 2 To store a waveform internally press save recall WAVEFORM gt Save Waveform main gt Refl Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 101 Saving and Recalling Waveforms NOTE Before doing step 3 that follows note the current Save Format see Figure 3 49 If you desire to save to a different format see To Select the Save Format on page 3 104 3 To store a waveform to disk press save recall WAVEFORM gt Save Waveform main gt To File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Finally press the side menu Save To Selected File to complete the operation N Tek Run 100KS7s Sample Save Waveform In To File To Refl active To Ref2 empty To Ref3 empty To Ref4 200mV M 3004S chi T 300mV 5 3 4 i E empty Recall E Delete Save File Format lin to Ref Refs Internat Utilities Eee Figure 3 47 Save Waveform Menu To Delete Waveforms To delete a reference waveform s that you no longer need Press save recall WAVEFORM gt Delete Refs main gt Delete Refl Delete Ref2 Delete Ref3 Delete Ref4 or Delete All Refs side To Delete All Waveforms and Setups To remove all stored waveforms and setups use the feature called Tek Secure It is described under Saving and Re
175. ge 3 31 3 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Port main gt File side to specify that any hardcopy made be output to a file on the floppy drive The file list and its scrollbar will appear 4 Turn the general purpose knob to place the scroll bar over the file in which to store the hardcopy NOTE Upon power on the digitizing oscilloscope creates the wild card file hardcopy format you select Selecting this file and pressing Hardcopy stores a hardcopy in a uniquely named sequentially numbered file For instance the digitizing oscilloscope saves the first hardcopy you save to the file TEK00001 FMT the second to TEK00002 FMT and so on TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Hardcopy 5 Press HARDCOPY to print your hardcopy to the selected file Saving files to the floppy disk provides a convenient way to store hardcopies for later recall and display at a remote site You can recall them using another digitizing oscilloscope at the remote sight You might also load them into your desktop publishing software that runs on a PC compatible To Print Using a Controller To make your hardcopies use the procedures that follow Connect to a Hardcopy Device To connect to a controller with two ports between the digitizing oscilloscope and the hardcopy device connect from the digitizing oscilloscope GPIB connector rear panel to the controller GPIB port and from the controller RS 232 or Centronics port to the
176. ger A stable trigger results in a uniform regular display triggered on the selected slope The trigger point must not switch between opposite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll across the screen on successive acquisitions The TRIG D LED stays constantly lighted when the SEC DIV setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the SEC DIV setting is 10 ms or slower 4 See the characteristic Sensitivity Edge Type Trigger DC Coupled in Table B 11 which begins on page B 14 5 The maximum frequency for a delaying events input 6 The minimum pulse width and rearm width required for recognizing a delaying event Table B 18 Typical Characteristics Data Handling Description Time Data R etention Nonvolatile Internal batteries installed at time of manufacture have a life of gt 5 years when operated Memory 2 and or stored at an ambient temperature from 0 C to 50 C Retention time of the nonvolatile memories is equal to the remaining life of the batteries Nonvolatile Memory Save Time 10 seconds Floppy Disk Drive Capacity Opt 1F only 3 5 in floppy disk 720 KB or 1 44 MB compatible with DOS 3 3 format for storing waveforms hard copies and instrument setups 1 The time that reference waveforms stored setups and calibration constants are retained when there is no power to the oscilloscope 2 Data is maintained by lithium poly carbon monofluoride B 20 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Ma
177. ger Point side to select whether or not to display a T indicating the trigger point You can select ON or OFF The trigger point indicates the position of the trigger in the waveform record TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Display Modes 3 Toggle Trigger Bar Style side to select either the short or the long trigger bar or to turn the trigger bar off See Figure 3 12 Note that both styles are shown for illustrating purposes but you can only display one style at a time The trigger bar is only displayed if the trigger source is an active displayed waveform Also two trigger bars are displayed when delay triggerable acquisitions are displayed one for the main and one for the delayed timebase The trigger bar is a visual indicator of the trigger level Sometimes especially when using the hardcopy feature you may wish to display the current date and time on screen For more information about displaying and setting date and time see To Date Time Stamp Your Hardcopy on page 3 37 4 Press Display Date Time side to turn it on or off Push Clear Menu to see the current date and time Tek Run 50 0MS s Sample Display Date Time ON Readout Options l l pe AA e AA eo A e oara Trigger P oint Indicator Trigger point Trigger Bar Style tong Trigger Bar Long Style Peele ea Sade ad EN BERNER F Display or a a Ne j ee ee Trigger Bar Short Style su WH
178. gitizing Oscilloscopes allow you to scale change the vertical or horizontal size and position move up down left or right waveforms on screen for best display Figure 2 29 shows the results of both vertical and horizontal scaling and positioning This section tells you how to quickly check and set vertical and horizontal scales and positions To quickly see the position of the waveform in the display check the channel reference indicator and the record view icons see Figure 2 29 m The channel reference icon at the left side of the display points to ground on the waveform record when offset is set to 0 V The oscilloscope contracts or expands the selected waveform around this point when you change the vertical scale m The record view at the top of the display indicates where the trigger occurs and what part of the waveform record is displayed Record View KR Channel Reference Icon Original Position Positioned Vertically Positioned Horizontally Original Scale Scaled Vertically Scaled Horizontally Figure 2 29 Scaling and Positioning TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 43 Tutorial 2 44 Vertical System Horizont
179. he data even when the oscilloscope is turned off or unplugged Rise time The time it takes for a leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value typically 10 to a HighRef value typically 90 of its amplitude TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 RMS Amplitude voltage measurement of the true Root Mean Square voltage Roll An acquisition mode useful at slow Horizontal SCALE settings Roll mode allows the waveform to be viewed as it is acquired point by point The waveform appears to roll across the display Sample acquisition mode The oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval That is the default mode of acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base For real time digitizers the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sample rate For equivalent time digitizers the time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of capturing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Two general methods of sampling are real time sampling and equivalent time sampling Selected waveform The waveform on which all measurements are performed and which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments The light next to one of the channel selector buttons indicates
180. he target waveform cycle between the MidRef crossings of two different SUR waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other Phase is a dual waveform measurement that is it is measured from a target waveform to a reference waveform To get a specific phase measurement specify the target and reference sources Phase is determined in the following manner 1 The first MidRefCrossing MCross1 Target and third MCross3 in the source target waveform are found 2 The period of the target waveform is calculated see Period above 3 The first MidRefCrossing MCross1Ref in the reference waveform crossing in the same direction polarity as that found MCross 1 Target for the target waveform is found 4 The phase is determined by the following MCrossIRef MCross1 Target amp i ae Period 360 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 9 Appendix C Algorithms Positive Duty Cycle Positive Overshoot Positive Width Rise Time zee C 10 If the target waveform leads the reference waveform phase is positive if it lags phase is negative Phase is not available in the Snapshot display Timing measurement The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage PositiveWidth is defined in Positive Width that follows If Period 0 or undefined then return an error if _
181. he digitizing oscilloscope controls To use the on line help system Press HELP to provide on screen information on any front panel button knob or menu item see Figure 3 1 When you press that button the oscilloscope changes mode to support on line help Press HELP again to return to regular operating mode Whenever the oscilloscope is in help mode pressing any button except HELP or SHIFT turning any knob or pressing any menu item displays help text on the screen that discusses that control The menu selections that are displayed when HELP is first pressed remain on the screen On line help is available for each menu selection displayed at the time the HELP button is first pressed If you are in help mode and want to see help on selections from non displayed menus you first exit help mode display the menu you want information on and press HELP again to re enter help mode TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 3 Accessing Help Help Mode is on Press HELP to exit Press any button or turn any Knob for information about that control Changing a control while in help mode does not affect the digitizing oscilloscope settings Press HELP again to exit the help mode 7 Press the SHIFT button before pressing front panel buttons that display help screens for shifted menus Acquire Application Hardcopy Delayed Trigger Single Trigger Status and Utility menus With Help off press S44 F7
182. he digitizing oscilloscope 1 Press SETUP Save Current Setup main STOP Before doing step 2 that follows note that if you choose a setup location labeled user you will overwrite the user setup previously stored there You can store setups in setup locations labeled factory without disturbing previously stored setups 2 To store a setup internally choose one of the ten storage locations from the side menu To Setup 1 To Setup 2 see Figure 3 46 Now the current setup is stored in that location 3 To store a setup to disk press To File Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Finally press the side menu Save To Selected File to complete the operation NOTE Setups are not transferable between different oscilloscope models or software versions TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 97 Saving and Recalling Setups To Recall a Setup Tek Run 100KS7s Sample A Save Current Setup In To File To Setup factory To Setup 2 factory To Setup3 factory 20 0m M 5004s Chis 27 2mv Eures 4 3 5 o a MH PORI IAOEE Ren e Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setu Setup Ola olololololo lo Figure 3 46 Save Recall Setup Menu To recall a setup stored internally press SETUP gt Recall Saved Set up main
183. he digitizing oscilloscope applies all waveform specific activities such as measurements or vertical scale and position to the selected channel You can select a channel waveform a math waveform or a reference waveform This section describes how to select a waveform and how you can turn the display of a waveform off To Identify the Selected Channel To determine which channel is currently selected check the channel readout It shows the selected channel in inverse video in the lower left corner of the display The channel reference indicator for the selected channel also appears in reverse video along the left side of the display See Figure 3 50 Tek Run 100KS s Sample Save Current Setup To File To Setup user Channel Reference Indicator En nn nn ee E ey setup 2 factory To Setup3 factory Channel Readout i icomv _ M 500us Chif 300mv more oOlololol do File Utilities Save Current Setu oJoIo JoJo lOoJO Figure 3 50 The Channel Readout TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 107 Selecting Channels To Select and Remove Waveforms Waveform Priority 3 108 To select a channel use the channel selection buttons on the right of the display On the TDS 420A and TDS 460A these buttons are labeled CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 and MORE On the TDS 410A these buttons are labe
184. hen MidRef could give a CLIPPING warning NOTE When measurements are displayed using Snapshot out of range warnings are NOT available However if you question the validity of any measurement in the snapshot display you can select and display the measurement individually and then check for a warning message TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual T See Appendix D Packaging for Shipment If you ship the digitizing oscilloscope pack it in the original shipping carton and packing material If the original packing material is not available package the oscilloscope as follows 1 Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside dimensions at least 15 cm 6 in taller wider and deeper than the digitizing oscilloscope The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard with 170 kg 375 pound test strength If you are shipping the digitizing oscilloscope to a Tektronix field office for repair attach a tag to the digitizing oscilloscope showing the oscilloscope owner and address the name of the person to contact about the oscilloscope the oscilloscope type and the serial number Wrap the digitizing oscilloscope with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent material to protect the finish Cushion the digitizing oscilloscope in the shipping carton by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the digitizing oscilloscope Allow 7 5 cm 3 in on all sides top and bottom
185. ible press more side repeatedly until the Frequency item appears then press Frequency side Observe that the frequency measurement appears within the right side of the graticule area The measurement readout includes the notation Chl meaning that the measurement is taken on the channel 1 waveform To take a measurement on another channel select that channel and then select the measurement tL 7 Press Positive Width side gt more side gt Rise Time side gt F Positive Duty Cycle side All four measurements are displayed Right now they cover a part of the graticule area including the displayed waveforms 8 To move the measurement readouts outside the graticule area press CLEAR MENU see Figure 2 15 Remove Measurement The Measure menu lets you remove measurements you no longer want dis Readouts played You can remove any one measurement or you can remove them all with a single menu item Press MEASURE Remove Measrmnt main gt Measurement 1 Measure ment 2 and Measurement 4 side to remove those measurements Leave the rise time measurement displayed Change the Measurement By default the measurement system uses the 10 and 90 levels of the Reference Levels waveform for taking the rise time measurement You can change these values to other percentages or change them to absolute voltage levels To examine the current values press Reference Levels main gt High Ref RJ side
186. ible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES German Postal Information Certificate ofthe Manufacturer Importer We hereby certify that the TDS 410A TDS 420A and TDS 46
187. ical menu 3 123 OK Confirm Clear Spool Hardcopy menu 3 40 OK Create Math Wfm More menu 3 132 OK Create Measurement Measure Delay menu 3 67 OK Erase Ref amp Panel Memory Utility menu 3 99 OK Store Template Acquire menu 3 55 ON Enable ET Acquire menu 3 10 ON STBY button 1 4 2 3 Optical probes 3 86 Option 2A A 1 Options A 1 A 8 Oscilloscope Glossary 6 Overall Display menu 3 22 Overshoot Glossary 7 Index 7 Index Overwrite Lock File Utilities menu 3 34 P Packaging D 1 Paired cursor 2 48 3 115 PAL Video Standard 3 126 PAL Display menu 3 24 PAL Video Trigger menu 3 126 Passive voltage probes 3 83 3 88 PCX 3 35 PCX Color Hardcopy menu 3 36 PCX Hardcopy menu 3 36 Peak detect acquisition mode 3 5 Glossary 6 Peak Detect Acquire menu 3 9 Peak to peak 3 60 Glossary 6 Performance Characteristics Nominal See Nominal Traits Typical See Warranted Characteristics Warranted See Warranted Characteristics Period 3 60 Glossary 6 Persistence 3 22 Phase 3 60 Glossary 6 Pixel Glossary 6 Pop up menu 2 8 Glossary 6 Port Hardcopy menu 3 37 Port Utility menu 3 91 Portrait Hardcopy menu 3 37 Pos Sync Video Trigger menu 3 127 Position Vertical 2 44 3 121 Position Vertical menu 3 123 Positive duty cycle 3 60 Positive overshoot 3 61 Positive width 3 61 Postscript 3 35 Posttrigger Glossary 7 Pouch A 1 Power connector 1 3 Power cords A 1 A 2
188. ies Accessory Part Number High Voltage Differential Probe P5200 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A Service Manual 070 9217 XX Plotter GPIB and Centronics Standard HC100 Plotter Centronics Standard HC200 Oscilloscope Cart K212 Rackmount Kit for field conversion 016 1166 00 Oscilloscope Camera C9 Oscilloscope Camera Adapter 016 1154 00 Soft Sided Carrying Case 016 1158 XX Transit Case 016 1157 00 GPIB Cable 1 meter 012 0991 01 GPIB Cable 2 meter 012 0991 00 Front Cover 200 3232 XX Pouch includes mounting plate 016 1159 00 VGA Cable Required to meet all emissions specifications CTL3VGAMM 5 LCOM part number Accessory Probes The following optional accessory amplifier and probes are recommended for use with your digitizing oscilloscope ADA400A analog differential preamplifier P5200 high voltage differential probe 1300 Volts P6101B 1X 15 MHz passive probe P6156 10X 3 5 GHz passive low capacitance low impedance Zo probe Option 25 provides 100X P6009 passive high voltage probe 100X 1500 VDC Peak AC P6015A passive high voltage probe 1000X 20 kVDC Peak AC 40 kV peak for less than 100 ms P6205 750 MHz probe bandwidth Active FET voltage probe TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual A 5 Appendix A Options and Accessories Probe Accessories A 6 P6204 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 GHz DC offset 50 Q input Use with 1103 TekProbe Power Suppl
189. ifferent traces or the gated region of the traces TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 59 Measuring Waveforms Table 3 3 Measurement Definitions Cont Name Definition Fall Time Timing measurement Time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value default 90 to a Low Ref value default 10 of its final value Frequency Timing measurement for the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second time and rise time measurements Calculated using either the min max or the histogram method The min max method uses the maximum value found The histogram method uses the most common value found above the mid point Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Low The value used as 0 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method it is the minimum value found With the histogram method it refers to the most common value found below the mid point Measured over the entire waveform or gated region FU TET High The value used as 100 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall P TT Maximum Voltage measurement The maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Measur
190. ified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Holdoff helps ensure a stable display Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters of a waveform The oscilloscope displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary Interpolation The way the digitizing oscilloscope calculates values for record points when the oscilloscope cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single trigger event That condition occurs when the oscilloscope is limited to real time sampling and the time base is set to a value that exceeds the effective sample rate of the oscilloscope The digitizing oscilloscope has two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Intensity Display brightness Knob A rotary control a Low The value used as 0 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments The value is calculated using either the min
191. ignals having rise and fall times gt 20 ns Sensitivity Edge Type Trigger DC 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 350 MHz TDS 410A and Coupled TDS 420A or 500 MHz TDS 460A for any channel as trigger source Sensitivity Video Type TV Field and TV 0 6 division of video sync signal Line Pulse Width minimum Events Delay 5 ns Auxiliary Trigger Input External Clock Input Connector BNC at rear panel Input Load equivalent to three TTL gate loads Input Voltage maximum 5 VDC to 10 VDC TTL levels recommended Auxiliary Trigger Maximum Input 10 MHz Frequenc peers Duty Cycle High and low levels must be stable for gt 50 ns Frequency External Clock DC to 10 MHz High and low levels must be stable for gt 50 ns 1 Net Offset Offset Position x Volts Div Net Offset is the voltage level at the center of the A D converter dynamic range Offset Accuracy is the accuracy of this voltage level 2 The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trigger A stable trigger results in a uniform regular display triggered on the selected slope The trigger point must not switch between opposite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll across the screen on successive acquisitions The TRIG D LED stays constantly lighted when the SEC DIV setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the SEC DIV setting is 10 ms or slower Table B 12 Warranted Characteristics Probe Compensator Output Desc
192. in gt Set to 10 Set to 50 or Set to 90 side or press Pretrigger side and use the general purpose knob to change the value The number of points that make up the waveform record is defined by the record length To set the waveform record length 1 press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Record Length main The side menu lists various discrete record length choices 2 To fit all or most of an acquired waveform to the visible screen regardless of record length press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Record Length main Then toggle Fit to Screen to ON from the side menu This provides similar functionality to being in zoom mode and changing the time division until the waveform fits the screen To turn off this feature toggle Fit to Screen to OFF NOTE With Option IM and 2A there are only 120K points available for reference waveforms If you select the 120K record length in the Horizontal menu you can only save one reference waveform Also you can only use display four waveforms Even if you do not display the source waveforms dual waveform math uses three of the four waveforms For example if you display a math waveform that is the sum of CH I and CH 2 even if CH 1 and CH 2 are not displayed you have used three waveforms Therefore you can only display one additional waveform TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 47 Horizontal Control 3 48 Horizontal Scale Roll Mode Horizontal Position To Select the Dela
193. ination Refi V Limit 4omaiv E E IE BERNER a PER RER z ae H Limit 40mdiv Toomv M 500s Chi f 108mV OK E ki Store Template Mode epetitive stop After Limit Test Limit Test RG Signal Limit Test Sample N RZS button Sources Sain aan Ola ekee ee Figure 3 26 Acquire Menu Create Limit Test Template Now create the envelope by specifying the amount of variation from the template that you will tolerate Tolerance values are expressed in fractions of a major division They represent the amount by which incoming waveform data can deviate without having exceeded the limits set in the limit test The range is from 0 the incoming waveform must be exactly like the template source to 5 major divisions of tolerance 4 Press V Limit side Enter the vertical voltage tolerance value using the general purpose knob TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Limit Testing 5 Press H Limit side Enter the horizontal time tolerance value using the general purpose knob 6 When you have specified the limit test template as you wish press OK Store Template side This action stores the specified waveform in the specified destination using the specified tolerances Until you have done so the template waveform has been defined but not created If you wish to create another lim
194. input scaled to the volts division setting of the channel used Expressed as a voltage a DL is equal to 1 25 of a division times the volts division setting 2 The sensitivity ranges from 1 mV div to 10 V div in a 1 2 5 sequence of coarse settings Between consecutive coarse settings the sensitivity can be finely adjusted with a resolution of 1 of the more sensitive setting For example between 50 mV div and 100 mV div the volts division can be set with 0 5 mV resolution 3 Rise time is defined by the following formula Rise Time ns Bw MA z B 4 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Nominal Traits Table B 3 Nominal Traits Time Base System Name Description Range Sample Rate 3 2 5 Samples s to 100 MSamples s Range Equivalent Time or Interpolated 200 MSamples s to 50 GSamples s Waveform Rates Range Seconds Division 1 ns div to 20 s div Range Time Base Delay Time 0 to 20 seconds Reference Frequency Time Base 100 MHz Record Length Selection 500 1 000 2 500 5 000 15 000 and 30 000 points Record lengths of 60 000 and 120 000 points are available with Option 1M4 Sampling Edge External Clock Negative edge with TTL threshold and tolerances Hi Res Averaging Period External Clock HiRes averaging done over period 1 maximum external clock rate gt but within lt L00 ns 1 to 2 us External clock edge before this period ends produces an invalid sample The range of
195. inuous 4 Amps DC maximum for durations lt 10 msec Output Video Provides a video signal non interlaced with levels that comply with ANSI RS343A Output is through a rear panel DB 15 connector Fuse Rating Either of two fuses may be used a 0 25 x 1 25 UL 198 6 3AG 5 A FAST 250 V or a5 mm x 20 mm IEC 127 4A T 250 V 1 VGA compatible at 30 6 kHz sync rate 2 Each fuse type requires its own fuse cap B 6 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Nominal Traits Table B 8 Nominal Traits Mechanical Name Cooling Method Description Forced air circulation with no air filter Construction Material Chassis parts constructed of aluminum alloy front panel constructed of plastic laminate circuit boards constructed of glass laminate Plastic parts are polycarbonate Finish Type Tektronix Blue textured vinyl finish on aluminum cabinet Weight Standard digitizing oscilloscope 8 6 kg 19 0 lbs oscilloscope only 10 2 kg 22 5 lbs with front cover accessories and accessories pouch installed 14 5 kg 32 0 lbs when packaged for domestic shipment Rackmount digitizing oscilloscope 8 2 kg 18 0 lbs plus the weight of rackmount parts for the rackmounted digitizing oscilloscope Option 1R 16 3 kg 36 0 lbs when the rackmounted digitizing oscilloscope is packaged for domestic shipment Rackmount conversion kit 4 5 kg 10 0 Ibs parts only 7 9 kg 17 5 lbs parts
196. ion method you selected in the Display menu linear interpolation or sin x x If you selected sin x x the default it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot to the waveform edges If that happens change the interpolation method to linear following the instructions on page 3 23 To differentiate between the real and interpolated samples set the display style to Intensified Samples TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 135 Zoom Checking the Zoom Factors To Zoom a Waveform 3 136 To quickly determine the zoom factors of a zoomed waveform select the waveform and check the zoom readout It shows the selected waveform by number along with the horizontal and vertical expansion factors The zoom readout appears at the top of the display when zoom is on See Figure 3 67 on page 3 137 To use Zoom select a waveform turn zoom on and magnify it using the vertical and horizontal scale knobs 1 Press any of the waveform selection buttons CH 1 through CH 4 on the TDS 420A and TDS 460A and CH 1 through CH 2 on the TDS 410A on the right side of the display Or press MORE and select a math or reference waveform from the More menu Press ZOOM Mode main gt ON side The ZOOM front panel button should light up Adjust the vertical zoom factor for the selected waveform using the vertical SCALE knob Adjust the vertical position of the zoomed waveform using the vertical POSITION knob Adjust the hori
197. ion Modes cece ccc ree ir cece cece cere ee eeeee 3 5 Delayed Triggering ccc cece cw cece ce cece eee eeeees 3 13 Determining Status ccc ccc cece cence nenn nenn nenn ne 3 19 Display Modes ricorrono irn 2 dm 3 21 Edge TSS Oring 4 4 53 8 22 3 27 File System 32 08 ah sen ahnt nen nenn 3 31 Hardcopy 2 2 0 2 een ee her 3 35 Horizontal Control 0 ccc ccc ce cece ce cece eee ee nenne 3 45 Limit Testing 2 0s 8 20 er En Se Sieg eee e s 3 53 Measuring Waveforms cccccccccsccsccccccescsceeees 3 59 Probe Accessories u en ana 3 71 Probe Compensation 0c cece cece cece cece eee en nen 3 81 Probe Selection occas die cede 2 ged a re Sea Sed es 3 83 Remote Communication 0 cece cece cece eee ee nenne 3 89 Rol Mode 4 ae menu 3 93 Saving and Recalling Setups 0 cc cece cece eee eee eeee 3 97 Saving and Recalling Waveforms ceceeecececeees 3 101 Selecting Channels 0c cccccccccccssccccecscnsssseecns 3 107 Setting Up Automatically Autoset and Reset 206 3 111 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual i Table of Contents Appendices Glossary Index Signal Path Compensation cc ccc cc ccc ccccccescscees 3 113 Taking Cursor Measurements ccccccccceccscscceces 3 115 Vertical Control a cirerer Sk ace a 3 121 Video Triggering rasen nen ee en 3 125 Waveform Math aie ie atin ave Sleds Sine
198. ions for each point in the waveform record NOTE Envelope and Average acquisition modes disable Roll mode See Roll Mode beginning on page 3 93 Average mode lets you acquire and display a waveform record that is the averaged result of several acquisitions This mode reduces random noise The oscilloscope acquires data after each trigger event using Sample mode It then averages the record point from the current acquisition with those stored from previous acquisitions TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Acquisition Modes Checking the Acquisition Readout Acquisition R eadout j Run 100kS s Sample To determine the acquisition sampling rate the acquisition state running or stopped and the acquisition mode check the acquisition readout at the top of the display see Figure 3 3 The running state shows the sample rate or External Clock when external clock is enabled and acquisition mode The stopped state shows the number of acquisitions acquired since the last stop or major change Acquisition Mode Hi Res un Laal Envelope 18 Toomv TO M 500s Chit d6mV Olo oo oj Average 16 Mode epetitive stop After Limit Test Limit Test teate Signal Limit Test Sample N R S button Sources Template E lol oa Figure 3
199. it interacts with the selected waveform It also describes how interpolation affects zoom Use Zoom press the ZOOM button when you wish to temporarily expand a waveform to inspect a small feature s on that waveform For example to temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations use zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically After you are finished you can return to your original horizontal scale setting by resetting zoom The zoom feature is also handy if you have acquired a waveform while using the fastest time per division and want to further expand the waveform horizontally Using With Waveforms When zooming vertically the digitizing oscilloscope expands or contracts the selected waveform only Also the oscilloscope only positions the selected waveform when in zoom When zooming horizontally zoom expands either the selected waveform all live waveforms or all live and reference waveforms depending on the setting for Horizontal Lock in the Zoom menu Interpolation and Zoom When you zoom in on a waveform on the display you expand a portion of it The digitizing oscilloscope may need to show more points for that portion than it has acquired If it needs to do this it interpolates The instrument can interpolate in either of two ways linear or sin x x The interpolation methods are described in Real Time Sampling on page 2 40 When you zoom the display redraws the waveforms using the interpolat
200. it test template store it in another destina tion to avoid overwriting the template you just created If you wish to view the template you created press the MORE button Then press the button corresponding to the destination reference memory you used The waveform appears on the display NOTE When Limit Testing is on the template waveform is dimmed so you can see the waveform through the template However to view the waveform data as well as the template envelope when limit testing is off use the Dots display style see Display Modes on page 3 21 To Select a Limit Test Now specify the channel that will acquire the waveforms to be compared against Source the template you created 1 On TDS 420A and TDS 460A press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Limit Test Sources main gt Compare Ch1 to Compare Ch2 to Compare Ch3 to or Compare Ch4 to side On TDS 410A press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Limit Test Sources main gt Compare Chl to Compare Ch2 to side 2 Once you select one of the channels as a waveform source from the side menu press the same side menu button to toggle to one of the reference memories in which you stored a template Valid selections are any of the four reference waveforms Refl through Ref4 or None Choosing None turns limit testing off for the specified channel NOTE Specify the same reference memory you chose as the template destination if you wish to use the template you just created If you hav
201. ivision settings 10 mV div 500 mV div gt 80 1 at 100 MHz and gt 30 1 at full bandwidth for any two channels having equal volts division settings Delay Between Channels Full lt 200 ps between CH 1 and CH 2 all models and between CH 3 and CH 4 TDS 420A and TDS Bandwidth Equivalent Time 460A when both channels have equal volts division and coupling settings lt 450 ps for any other combination of two channels with equal volts division and coupling settings TDS 420A and TDS 460A Input Impedance DC 1 MQ 1 MQ 0 5 in parallel with 15 pF 2 0 pF Matched between channels to within 1 for resistance Coupled and 1 0 pF for capacitance Input Impedance DC 50 Q 50 Q 1 with VSWR lt 1 2 1 from DC 200 MHz Coupled TDS 410A and TDS 420A Input Impedance DC 50 Q 50 Q 1 with VSWR lt 1 6 1 from DC 400 MHz Coupled TDS 460A Input Voltage Maximum Volt Div Rating ae ie AC I1MQ orGND q 1 vidiv 10 Vidiv 400 V DC peak AC derate at 20 dB decade above 10 MHz p until the minimum rating of 5 V DC peak AC is reached 1 mV div 99 9 mV div 400 V DC peak AC derate at 20 dB decade above 10 kHz until the minimum rating of 5 V DC peak AC is reached Input Voltage Maximum 5 Ves with peaks less than or equal to 30 V DC 50 Q or AC 50 Q Coupled B 12 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification Table B 9 Warranted Characteristics Signal Acquisition System Cont Nam
202. l representation of the input signal by sampling the voltage level of the signal at regular time intervals see Figure 2 25 The sampled points are stored in memory along with corresponding timing information The oscilloscope uses this digital representation of the signal for display measurements or further processing om oN 5 0 V 5 0 V r a e i OV OV OV OV w ef od ee g 5 0 V 5 0 V Input Signal Sampled Points Digital Values Figure 2 25 Acquisition Input Analog Signal Sample and Digitize Each time it takes a sample the oscilloscope digitizer produces a numeric representation of the signal The number of samples may be larger than the number of points in your waveform record In fact the oscilloscope may take several samples for each record point see Figure 2 26 lt Interval for one waveform record point Samples for a record point Figure 2 26 Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used The digitizer can use the extra samples to perform additional processing such as averaging or looking for minimum and maximum values The digitizing oscilloscope creates a waveform record containing a user specified number of data points Each record point represents a certain voltage level that occurs a determined amount of time from the trigger event TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 39 Tutorial 2 40 Trigger Point The trigger point marks time zero in a waveform reco
203. laced You also can define the signal to be NTSC PAL SECAM or a custom class Trigger Modes The trigger mode determines how the oscilloscope behaves in the absence of a trigger event The digitizing oscilloscope provides two different trigger modes normal and automatic Normal trigger mode enables the oscilloscope to acquire a waveform only when it is triggered If no trigger occurs the oscilloscope will not acquire a waveform You can push FORCE TRIGGER to force the oscilloscope to make a single acquisition Automatic trigger mode auto mode enables the oscilloscope to acquire a waveform even if a trigger does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after a trigger event occurs If another trigger event is not detected before the timer times out the oscilloscope forces a trigger anyway The length of time it waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting Be aware that auto mode when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering events does not sync the waveform on the display In other words successive acquisitions are not triggered at the same point on the waveform therefore the waveform appears to roll across the screen Of course if valid triggers occur the display becomes stable on screen Since auto mode forces a trigger in the absence of one auto mode is useful in observing signals where you are only concerned with monitoring amplitude level Although the unsynced waveform may roll across th
204. le intensity level graticule and format Change Display Settings To bring up the Display menu press DISPLAY To Select the Display Style Press DISPLAY gt Style main gt Vectors Intensified Samples Dots Infinite Persistence or Variable Persistence side Figure 3 11 Tek Run 10 0kS 5 Sample Display Style ali Vectors Dots Intensified Samples Infinite Persistence 2oomv lt M5 00ms Chi FzmV BEE CIO C O Style 3 Readout Filter Graticule Format EA veers Options Sin x x Full vr oJoIoJoJo lOJO Figure 3 11 Display Menu Style Vectors style displays draw vectors lines between the record points Dots style displays waveform record points as dots TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 21 Display Modes 3 22 Adjust Intensity Set Display Readout Options Intensified Samples style also displays waveform record points as dots However the points actually sampled are displayed intensified relative to the interpolated points In addition to choosing Intensified Samples in the side menu the oscilloscope must be interpolating equivalent time must be off or Zoom must be on with its horizontal expansion greater that 1X See interpolation on page 2 40 see Zoom beginning on page 3 135 Variable Persistence style accumulates the record points on screen over ma
205. led CH 1 CH 2 and MORE The MORE button allows you to select internally stored Math and Ref waveforms for display and manipulation The selected channel is indicated by the lighted LED above each button NOTE With Option IM and 2A there are only 120K points available for reference waveforms If you select the 120K record length in the Horizontal menu then you can only save one reference waveform Also you can only use display four waveforms Even if you do not display the source waveforms Dual waveform math uses three of the four waveforms For example if you display a math waveform that is the sum of CH I and CH 2 even if CH 1 and CH 2 are not displayed you have used three waveforms Therefore you can only display one additional waveform Do the following steps to first display and then remove waveforms from the display 1 Press CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 or CH 4 CH 1 or CH 2 on the TDS 410A to turn on as many of these channels as desired The one you select last or first if you only select one becomes the selected channel Selecting a channel turns it on if it is not already on You do not use the channel selection buttons to select the trigger source Instead you select the trigger source in the Main Trigger menu or Delayed Trigger menu 2 The WAVEFORM OFF button turns OFF the display of the selected channel waveform It will also remove from the display any automated measurements being made on that waveform 3 To select
206. ly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left To stop acquiring data press RUN STOP Use untriggered roll to continuously observe a slow process knowing that you can always see the most recent view of that process Untriggered roll mode with single sequence displays newly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left Acquisitions automatically stop after a complete waveform record is acquired Use untriggered roll with single sequence to observe data for later viewing For example at 20 seconds per division at 30K record length there are 60 screens or 600 divisions or 12000 seconds of acquired data points Untriggered roll with single sequence would capture data over a lunch hour and hold it for later viewing TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 93 Roll Mode Untriggered Roll New Data Points New Data Points
207. m is improperly scaled clipped low signal amplitude low resolution and so on To vary the source for taking a snapshot simply select another channel math or ref memory waveform and then execute snapshot again A snapshot is taken on a single waveform acquisition or acquisition sequence The measurements in the snapshot display are not continuously updated Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals You might measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform Note that pushing any button in the main menu except for Snapshot or any front panel button that displays a new menu removes the snapshot from display Use High Low Setup page 3 64 Reference Levels page 3 65 and Gated Measurements page 3 63 with snapshot exactly as you would when you display individual measurements from the Select Measrmnt menu See Appendix C Algorithms on page C 1 for details on how the digitizing oscilloscope calculates each automatic measurement See Measurements on page 2 47 for a brief discussion of automated cursor and graticule measurements See Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements on page 2 24 for a tutorial example of making automatic measurements TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 69 Measuring Waveforms 3 70 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Accessories The probe you use and how you connect it to a signal source affect the oscillo scope a
208. m to absolute voltage levels To examine the current values press Reference Levels main gt High Ref ea side The general purpose knob the large knob is now set to adjust the high reference level Figure 2 16 There are several important things to observe on the screen m The knob icon appears at the top of the screen The knob icon indicates that the general purpose knob has just been set to adjust a parameter m The upper right corner of the screen shows the readout High Ref 90 m The High Ref side menu item is highlighted and a box appears around the 90 readout in the High Ref menu item The box indicates that the general purpose knob is currently set to adjust that parameter Turn the general purpose knob left and right and then use it to adjust the high level to 80 That sets the high measurement reference to 80 Hint To make large changes quickly with the general purpose knob press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light above the SHIFT button is lit and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly Display a Snapshot of You have seen how to display up to four individual automated measurements on Automated Measurements screen You can also pop up a display of almost all of the automated measure ments available in the Select Measrmnts side menus This snapshot of measure ments is taken on the waveform currently selected using the ch
209. mit testing you must turn limit testing on in order for any of these actions to take effect 3 Ensure that Limit Test side reads ON If it reads OFF press Limit Test side once to toggle it to ON When you set Limit Test to ON the digitizing oscilloscope compares incoming waveforms against the waveform template stored in reference memory according to the settings in the Limit Test Sources side menu You can compare a single waveform against a single template When making a single waveform versus a single template comparison consider the following operating characteristics m The waveform is repositioned horizontally to move the first sample in the waveform record that is outside of template limits to center screen m The position of the waveform template tracks that of the waveform You can also compare more than one waveform against a single template or more than one waveform with each one compared against its own template When comparing multiple waveforms consider the following operating characteristics TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Limit Testing m You should set Horizontal Lock to None in the Zoom side menu push ZOOM and toggle Horizontal Lock to None m With horizontal lock set as just described the oscilloscope repositions each waveform horizontally to move the first sample in the waveform record that is outside of template limits to center screen m If you are comparing each waveform to its
210. n Mbytes if the free space is I Mbyte or more To convert the amount to bytes you simply multiply the Kbytes amount times 1024 Thus the 690 Kbytes shown in Figure 3 15 690 Kbytes x 1024 bytes Kbyte 706 560 bytes Bytes are only shown if the free space is less than I Kbyte Kbytes are only shown if the free space is 1 Kbyte or more but less than I Mbyte I Mbyte is shown if the free space is 1 Mbyte or more To Delete a File or Directory To delete a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file or directory to delete Then press the side menu Delete button To delete all files in the file list set the cursor to the selection The digitizing oscilloscope deletes directories recursively That means it deletes both the directory and all its contents To Rename a File or Directory 3 32 To rename a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file or directory to delete For example to rename Then press the side menu Rename button The labelling menu should appear Turn the general purpose knob or use the main menu arrow keys to select each letter Press Enter Char from the main menu to enter each letter When you have entered the name press the side menu OK Accept item See Figure 3 16 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual File System Tek Run 100KS s Sample Enter Label
211. n blue and page 3 107 OCH3 coarse knob speed Display Modes page 3 21 Remote Communication page 3 89 DELAYED TRIG TRIGGER HORIZONTAL MENU XN gt MENU O MORE Waveform Math OJ lt 4 scate gt SET LEVEL O TaIfiD page 3 131 y N Removing Waveforms as n i Weme O page 3 108 er MQ 2 PROBE COMP ca L 5V IL Ground Vertical Control Zoom Horizontal Control Triggering page 2 31 page 3 121 page 3 135 page 3 45 Delay Triggering page 3 13 Edge Triggering page 3 27 Video Triggering page 3 125 2 4 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual At a Glance Rear Panel Map GPIB Connector Fuse Power Connector page 3 89 page 1 3 page 1 3 VIDEO VGA Compatible AUX TRIGGER EXT CLOCK Serial Number Principal P ower Switch Connector page F 1 Provides Auxiliary Trigger page 1 4 and External Clock Input page 3 49 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 5 At a Glance Display Map When present the general purpose The value entered with the knob makes coarse adjustments Trigger Position T general purpose knob when absent fine adjustments Acquisition Sta
212. n the graticule area because a menu is displayed You can press the CLEAR MENU button at any time to remove any menus and to move the readouts below the graticule S Tek Run 100KS7s Sample 7 mn nal Trigger Position d i Factory Indicator N i Channel Ground Reference Indicator CIO O O i 1 00V M 500ms Chif 300mY OK Na ee Ke A Confirm i y Factory Init Recall i Factory Setu File Utilities Kelten Channel Time Base Trigger Readout Readout Readout Figure 2 5 The Display After Factory Initialization 2 16 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Example 1 Displaying a Waveform The TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes provides front panel knobs for you to adjust a waveform or it can automatically set up its controls to display a waveform Do the following tasks to learn how to adjust a waveform and how to autoset the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes Adjusting the Waveform The display shows the probe compensation signal It is a 1 kHz square wave of Display approximately 0 5 V amplitude Do the following steps to adjust the size and placement of the waveform using the front panel knobs Figure 2 6 shows the main VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL sections of the front panel Each has SCALE and POSITION knobs 1 Turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise Obse
213. nd measuring waveforms Its performance addresses the needs of both lab and portable applications with the following features m 400 MHz maximum analog bandwidth on the TDS 460A 200 MHz maximum analog bandwidth on the TDS 410A and TDS 420A m 100 Megasamples second maximum digitizing rate m Roll mode and triggered roll mode for display of slower waveforms m Waveform Math Invert a single waveform and add subtract and multiply two waveforms On instruments equipped with option 2F integrate or differentiate a single waveform or perform an FFT fast fourier transform on a waveform to display its magnitude or phase versus its frequency Up to 30 000 point record length per channel 120 000 point optional m Full GPIB software programmability GPIB hardcopy output On instru ments equipped with option 13 hardcopy output using the RS 232 or Centronics ports On board printer capability with option 3P instruments m Complete measurement and documentation ability m Intuitive graphical icon operation blended with the familiarity of traditional horizontal and vertical knobs m Four channels and four eight bit digitizers on TDS 420A and TDS 460A Two channels and two eight bit digitizers on TDS 410A m On line help at the touch of a button The Appendices list options accessories and the product specifications Ne TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 1 1 Product Description The product specification i
214. ntical 8 bits Clock Internal IR A l time div Resolution pires lt s 05 0 se lt 15 bits Clock External Resolution pre 8 lt e 05 u lt 11 8 bits A Bandwidth Hi Res Mode InputChannels Number of InputCoupling InputResistance Selections Ranges Offset AllChannels Range Position Range Sensitivity Clock Internal amp 50 For tus div and slower BW pres 0 44 ar Clock External Wan 44 GoekExiemaene Hz TDS 410A Two both identical called CH 1 and CH 2 TDS 420A and TDS 460A Four all identical called CH 1 through CH 4 DC AC or GND 1MQ or 50Q Volts Div Setting Offset Range 1 mV div to 99 5 mV div 1V 100 mV div to 995 mV div 10 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 V 5 divisions 1 mV div to 10 V div TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 3 Appendix B Nominal Traits Table B 2 Nominal Traits Signal Acquisition System Cont Name Description Rise Time Volts Div Setting Rise Time DS ALM and TOS 3208 5 mV div 10 Vidiv 1 75 ns 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 2 33 ns 1 mV div 1 99 mV div 3 68 ns Rise Times Volts Div Setting Rise Time TDS 460A 5 mV div 10 V div 875 ps 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 1 4 ns 1 mV div 1 99 mV div 3 5 ns 1 Displayed vertically with 25 digitization levels DLs per division and 10 24 divisions dynamic range with zoom off A DL is the smallest voltage level change resolved by the 8 bit A D Converter with the
215. nu and then selecting from the rising or falling slope icons in the side menu that appears The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs see Figure 2 21 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Positive Going Edge Negative Going Edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically I yY Trigger slope can be positive or negative Figure 2 21 Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger The digitizing oscilloscope lets you set the main trigger level with the trigger MAIN LEVEL knob Delayed Trigger System The oscilloscope also has a delayed trigger system that provides an edge trigger When using the delayed time base you can also delay the acquisition of a waveform for a user specified time or a user specified number of delayed trigger events or both after a main trigger event Video Trigger System If your oscilloscope has the Option 5 Video Trigger it gives you a variety of selections for triggering on video signals Triggering From the Front The trigger buttons and knob let you quickly adjust the trigger level or force a Panel trigger see Figure 2 22 The trigger readout and status screen lets you quickly determine the state of the trigger system You use the following trigger controls and readouts for all trigger types except were noted To Set the MAIN LEVEL To manually change the trigger level when triggering turn the MAIN LEVEL knob It adjusts the trigger le
216. nual EP 7 Appendix C Algorithms Tektronix TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes can take 25 automatic measure ments By knowing how the oscilloscope makes these calculations you may better understand how to use your oscilloscope and how to interpret your results Measurement Variables The digitizing oscilloscope uses a variety of variables in its calculations These include High Low High is the value used as the 100 level in measurements such as fall time and rise time For example if you request the 10 to 90 rise time then the oscilloscope will calculate 10 and 90 as percentages with High representing 100 Low is the value used as the 0 level in measurements such as fall time and rise time The exact meaning of High and Low depends on which of two calculation methods you choose from the High Low Setup item in the Measure menu These are Min max and Histogram Min Max Method defines the 0 and the 100 waveform levels as the lowest amplitude most negative and the highest amplitude most positive samples The min max method is useful for measuring frequency width and period for many types of signals Min max is sensitive to waveform ringing and spikes however and does not always measure accurately rise time fall time overshoot and undershoot The min max method calculates the High and Low values as follows High Max and Low Min Histogram Method attempts to find the highest density of points above an
217. ny acquisitions and displays them only for a specific time interval In that mode the display behaves like that of an analog oscilloscope You enter the time for that option with the general purpose knob Infinite Persistence lets the record points accumulate until you change some control such as scale factor causing the display to be erased Intensity lets you set overall text graticule and waveform intensity brightness levels To set the contrast intensity of the intensified portion of a waveform Press DISPLAY gt Intensity main gt Overall Text Grat Waveform or Contrast side Enter the intensity percentage values with the general purpose knob All intensity adjustments operate over a range from 20 close to fully off to 100 fully bright Contrast operates over a range from 100 no contrast to 250 intensified portion at full brightness NOTE The Intensified setting for Timebase in the horizontal menu causes a zone on the waveform to be intensified relative to the rest of the waveform Ifthe contrast is set to 100 you can not distinguish the intensified portion from the rest of the waveform because both are the same brightness Readout options control whether the trigger indicator trigger level bar and current date and time appear on the display The options also control what style trigger level bar long or short is displayed 1 Press DISPLAY Readout main 2 Toggle Display T Trig
218. o change the value of the assigned parameter GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as the IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You use it to visually measure waveform parameters Ground GND coupling Coupling option that disconnects the input signal from the vertical system Hardcopy An electronic copy of the display in a format useable by a printer or plotter Hi Res acquisition mode An acquisition mode in which the digitizing oscilloscope averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point That average results in a higher resolution lower bandwidth waveform That mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling High The value used as 100 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments Calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the maximum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found above the mid point See Appendix C Algorithms for details Holdoff trigger A spec
219. o one cycle For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle area rather than the arithmetic area If Start End then return the interpolated value at Start Otherwise End Area Waveform t dt Start For details of the integration algorithm see page C 12 Burst Width Timing measurement The duration of a burst UU 1 Find MCross1 on the waveform This is MCrossStart 2 Find the last MCross begin the search at EndCycle and search toward StartCycle This is MCrossStop This could be a different value from MCross1 3 Compute BurstWidth MCrossStop MCrossStart Cycle Area Amplitude voltage measurement The area over one waveform cycle For non cyclical data you might prefer to use the Area measurement If StartCycle EndCycle then return the interpolated value at StartCycle EndCycle CycleMean Waveform t dt StartCycle For details of the integration algorithm see page C 12 Cycle Mean Amplitude voltage measurement The mean over one waveform cycle For Poe non cyclical data you might prefer to use the Mean measurement If StartCycle EndCycle then return the interpolated value at StartCycle EndCycle Waveform t dt StartCycle EndCycle StartCycle x SampleInterval CycleMean For details of the integration algorithm see page C 12 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 5 Appendix C Algorithms C 6 Cycle RMS Delay Fall Time
220. o the following steps 1 Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Delay To main gt Measure Delay to 2 Press Measure Delay to side repeatedly to choose the delay to waveform For TDS 420A and TDS 460A the choices are Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 and Math1 Math2 Math3 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 and Ref4 For TDS 410A the choices are Ch1 Ch2 and Math1 Math2 Math3 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 and Ref4 The steps just performed select the waveform you want to measure to note that the waveform you are measuring the delay from is the selected wave form See Figure 3 31 3 66 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Measuring Waveforms Tek Run 100KS s Sample Measure Delay to Ch1 FE Delay from Selected wfm Measurement ch Verify or change the waveform to which Delay will be measured the Search Direction and the Edges at which to measure When you are satisfied with the selections press Create Press CLEAR MENU to return to the Measure menu without creating the Delay measurement 10mY OK Create Measurement Delay To Edges Chi E F S a ee CO D Figure 3 31 Measure Delay Menu Delay To OS 3 Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Edges main A side menu of delay edges and directions appears Choose from one of the combinations di
221. ocess called interpolation to create the intervening points in the waveform record There are two options for interpolation linear or sin x x Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve That is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial waves Actually it is appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times NOTE When using either type of interpolation you may wish to set the display style so that the real samples are displayed intensified relative to the interpolated samples The instructions under To Select the Display Style on page 3 21 explain how to turn on intensified samples Equivalent Time Sampling The digitizing oscilloscope only uses equivalent time sampling if you have enabled the equivalent time option in the Acquisition menu the oscilloscope is not able to get enough samples with which to create a waveform record and the time base is faster than 500 ns In equivalent tim
222. of a waveform do the following steps 1 Press the channel selection button of the channel you wish to measure Note the vertical scale factor for the channel in the channel readout on screen 2 Count the graticule divisions between to two features to be measured and multiply by the vertical scale factor For example if you count five major vertical graticule divisions between the minimum and maximum values of a waveform at a scale factor of 100 mV di vision then you can easily calculate your peak to peak voltage as 5 divisions x 100 mV division 500 mV NOTE When you select the NTSC graticule the volts per division of all selected channels is set to 143 mV div 152 mV div for PAL where the divisions are those of the conventional graticule not the divisions of the video graticules For NTSC the actual grid lines represent 10 IRE and for PAL the lines are 100 mV apart TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 49 Tutorial Measure Waveform Time To measure the time of a waveform repeat the process just described but count the horizontal divisions and multiply by the horizontal scale factor For example if you count five major vertical graticule divisions for one waveform cycle at a horizontal scale factor of 50 us division then you can easily calculate the waveform period as 5 divisions x 50 uS division 250 us or 400 kHz For More Information For more information on taking measurements using your
223. of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Provide Proper Ventilation Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual ix General Safety Summary Do Not Operate With If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified Suspected Failures service personnel Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury haza
224. olololololo Figure 2 13 The Menus After Changing Channels Remove a Waveform Pressing the WAVEFORM OFF button removes the waveform for the currently selected channel If the waveform you want to remove is not already selected select that channel using the channel CH button To remove a waveform from the display do the following 1 Press WAVEFORM OFF under the vertical SCALE knob Since the CH 2 light was on when you pressed the WAVEFORM OFF button the channel 2 waveform was removed The channel CH lights now indicate channel 1 Channel 1 has become the selected channel When you remove the last waveform all the CH lights are turned off 2 Press WAVEFORM OFF again to remove the channel 1 waveform TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 23 Tutorial Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements The TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes can measure many waveform parame ters automatically and read out the results on screen Do the following tasks to discover how to set up the oscilloscope to measure waveforms automatically Display Measurements To use the automated measurement system you must have a stable display of Automatically your signal Also the waveform must have all the segments necessary for the measurement you want For example a rise time measurement requires at least one rising edge and a frequency measurement needs at least one complete cycle To take automated measurements do the following steps
225. on your controller If a time out occurs increase the time out setting of your controller software 4 Type IBWRT HARDCOPY START NOTE Be sure the digitizing oscilloscope Utility menu is set to Talk Listen and not Hardcopy Talk Only or you will get an error message at this step Setting the digitizing oscilloscope Utility menu was described in To Set Up for Making Hardcopies on page 3 36 5 Type IBRDF lt Filename gt where lt Filename gt is a valid DOS file name you want to call your hardcopy information It should be lt 8 characters long with up to a 3 character extension For example you could type ibrdf screenl 6 Exit the IBIC program by typing EXIT 7 Copy the data from your file to your hardcopy device Type COPY lt Filename gt lt Output port gt lt B gt where lt Filename gt is the name you defined in step 5 lt Output port gt is the PC output port your hardcopy device is connected to such as LPT1 or LPT2 For example to copy print a file called screen to a printer attached to the pt parallel port type copy screen Ipt1 B Your hardcopy device should now print a picture of the digitizing oscilloscope screen NOTE If you transmit hardcopy files across a computer network use a binary 8 bit data path TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Hardcopy Connection Strategies The digitizing oscilloscope can print a copy of its display in many form
226. on page 2 39 See Display Modes on page 3 21 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 139 Zoom 3 140 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Options Option 02 Front Cover and Pouch Option 05 Video Trigger Option 1F File System Option 13 RS 232 Centronics Hardcopy Interface Option 2F Advanced DSP Math Option 3P Printer Pack Option 2A 120 000 Point Record Length and Video Trigger This appendix describes the various options as well as the standard and optional accessories that are available for the TDS 410A TDS 420A and TDS 460A Digitizing Oscilloscopes The following options are available With this option Tektronix ships a front cover and pouch with the instrument This option provides a video trigger It lets you trigger on positive or negative sync pulses It also lets you select interlaced field one interlaced field two or both fields noninterlaced You can define the signal class to be NTSC PAL SECAM or you can customize the class With this option Tektronix ships the digitizing oscilloscope with a floppy disk drive and a variety of features for managing the floppy disk With the file system you can save and recall setups waveforms and hardcopies on a floppy disk With this option Tektronix ships the oscilloscope equipped with an RS 232 and a Centronics interface that can be used to obtain hardcopies of the oscilloscope screen
227. ortion of the triggering signal Low frequency rejection attenuates signals below 80 kHz Noise Rejection coupling lowers trigger sensitivity It requires additional signal amplitude for stable triggering reducing the chance of falsely triggering on noise Trigger Position The adjustable trigger position defines where on the waveform record the trigger occurs It lets you properly align and measure data within records The part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion The part that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion To help you visualize the trigger position setting the top part of the display has an icon indicating where the trigger occurs in the waveform record You select in the Horizontal menu what percentage of the waveform record will contain pretrigger information Many users find displaying pretrigger information a valuable troubleshooting technique For example if you are trying to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test circuit it may prove valuable to trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough to capture data before the glitch By analyzing what happened before the glitch you may uncover clues about the source of the glitch Slope and Level The slope control determines whether the oscilloscope finds the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal see Figure 2 21 You set trigger slope by selecting Slope in the Main Trigger me
228. oscilloscope see Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 115 Measuring Waveforms on page 3 59 Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements on page 2 24 Waveform Math on page 3 131 and the TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual if your oscilloscope is equipped with that option 2 50 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Overview This section describes the details of operating the digitizing oscilloscope It contains an alphabetical list of tasks you can perform with the digitizing oscilloscope Use this section to answer specific questions about instrument operation The following tasks are included Accessing Help Acquisition Modes Delayed Triggering Determining Status Display Modes Edge Triggering File System Hardcopy Horizontal Control Limit Testing Measuring Waveforms Probe Compensation Probe Selection Remote Communication Roll Mode Saving and Recalling Setups Saving and Recalling Waveforms Selecting Channels Setting up Automatically Signal Path Compensation Taking Cursor Measurements Vertical Control Video Triggering Waveform Math Zoom Many of these tasks list steps you perform to accomplish the task You should read Conventions on page xii of Preface before reading about these tasks TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Overview 3 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Accessing Help To Display Help The on line help system provides brief information about each of t
229. oscilloscope probes The P6138 probes included with the digitizing oscilloscope are passive probes The high input resistance of passive probes typically 10 MQ provides negligible DC loading and makes them a good choice for accurate DC amplitude measure ments However their 8 pF to 12 pF over 60 pF for 1X capacitive loading can distort timing and phase measurements Use high input resistance passive probes for the following measurements m Device characterization above 15 V thermal drift applications m Maximum amplitude sensitivity using 1X high impedance m Large voltage range between 15 and 500 V m Qualitative or go no go measurements Low impedance probes measure frequency more accurately than general purpose probes but they make less accurate amplitude measurements They offer a higher bandwidth to cost ratio TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 83 Probe Selection High Voltage Probes Active Voltage Probes 3 84 These probes must be terminated in a 50 Q scope input Input capacitance is much lower than high Z passive probes typically 1 pF but input resistance is also lower 500 to 5000 Q typically Although that DC loading degrades amplitude accuracy the lower input capacitance reduces high frequency loading to the circuit under test That makes Zo probes ideal for timing and phase measurements when amplitude accuracy is not a major concern Zo probes are useful for measurements up to 40 V High
230. ous example follow the instructions on page 2 13 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples 2 Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side 3 Press gt AUTOSET 4 Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main gt Frequency side Press the more side menu item ifthe Frequency selection does not appear in the side menu 5 Press CH 2 gt CLEAR MENU 6 Press SETUP Save Current Setup main to display the Setup main menu see Figure 2 18 CAUTION Setup locations in the side menu are labeled either user or factory If N you save your current setup in a location labeled user you overwrite and lose forever the user setup previously stored there Setup locations labeled factory have the factory setup stored as a default and can be used to store current setups without disturbing previously stored setups TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 29 Tutorial 2 30 Recall a Setup Tek Run 100KS s Sample Save Current Setup To File To Setup1 factory To Setup 2 factory To Setup3 factory 10f3 OS 200mV i q M 500s Chis 280mv more Save keca File OCE Factory File Setu Setup utilities Ololololololo Figure 2 18 Save Recall Setup Menu 7 Press one of the To Setup side menu buttons to store the curren
231. own template the position of each waveform template tracks that of its waveform m If you are comparing two or more waveforms to a common template that template tracks the position of the failed waveform If more than one waveform fails during the same acquisition the template tracks the position of the waveform in the highest numbered channel For example CH 2 is higher than CH 1 For More Information See Acquisition on page 2 39 See Acquisition Modes on page 3 5 See Display Modes on page 3 21 See Zoom on page 3 135 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 57 Limit Testing 3 58 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual z FE 7 Measuring Waveforms Measurement List There are various ways to measure properties of waveforms You can use graticule cursor or automatic measurements This section describes automatic measurements cursors and graticules are described elsewhere See Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 115 and Measurements on page 2 47 Automatic measurements are generally more accurate and quicker than for example manually counting graticule divisions The oscilloscope continuously updates and displays these measurements There is also a way to display all the measurements at once see Take a Snapshot of Measurements on page 3 68 Automatic measurements are taken over the entire waveform record or if you specify gated measurements over the region specified by the vertical cursors
232. p 2 8 Glossary 6 Save Recall 3 97 Save Recall Setup 2 10 Save Recall Waveform 2 10 3 101 Setup 2 14 Status 3 19 3 20 status 2 10 Utility 2 11 3 36 3 91 Video Trigger 3 125 Mid Ref Measure menu 3 65 Mid2 Ref Measure menu 3 65 Min Max Measure menu 3 64 Minimum 3 60 Glossary 5 Mode Cursor 2 48 Mode amp Holdoff Main Trigger menu 3 29 Mode amp Holdoff Video Trigger menu 3 129 Mode Acquire menu 3 9 Model number location 2 3 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual MORE button 3 55 3 103 3 108 3 131 More menu 2 10 3 103 3 131 Change Math waveform definition 3 132 Dual Wfm Math 3 132 Math1 2 3 3 133 OK Create Math Waveform 3 132 Reference waveform status 3 103 Set 1st Source to 3 132 Set 2nd Source to 3 132 Set Function to 3 132 Set operator to 3 132 Set Single Source to 3 132 Single Wfm Math 3 131 N Neg Sync Video Trigger menu 3 127 Negative duty cycle 3 60 Negative overshoot 3 60 Negative width 3 60 Noise Rej Main Trigger menu 3 28 Nominal Traits Defined B 3 Listed B 3 NonInterlaced Both Fields Video Trigger menu 3 128 Normal trigger mode 2 32 Glossary 6 Normal Main Trigger menu 3 29 Normal Video Trigger menu 3 129 NTSC Video Standard 3 126 NTSC Display menu 3 24 NTSC Video Trigger menu 3 126 O OFF Real Time Only Acquire menu 3 10 Off Bus Utility menu 3 91 Offset Vertical 2 44 3 123 Offset Vert
233. p TDS 460A User Manual 3 35 Hardcopy To Set Up for Making Hardcopies Before you make a hardcopy you need to set up communications and hardcopy parameters This discussion assumes that the hardcopy device is already connected to the GPIB port on the rear panel If that is not the case see Connec tion Strategies on page 3 43 To Set Communication To set up the communication parameters to talk to a printer attached directly to Parameters the oscilloscope GPIB port 1 Press SHIFT UTILITY gt System main gt I O pop up gt Confi gure main see Figure 3 17 2 Press Hardcopy Talk Only side Tek Run 100KS s Sample GPIB Address 1 GPIB Konfiguration f IL E Hardcopy Talk Only Off Bus 200mV Ch2 100mY M 500us Chi 20mY eect ie eee eee eee ee System Port Talk lsten Or lt GPIB gt ONSISISIO olololololo ol Figure 3 17 Utility Menu System I O To Set Hardcopy To specify the hardcopy format layout and type of port using the hardcopy Parameters menu 1 Press SHIFT HARDCOPY MENU to bring up the Hardcopy menu 2 Press Format main gt Thinkjet Deskjet Laserjet Epson DPU 411 DPU 412 PCX TIFF BMP EPS Image EPS Mono EPS Color EPS 3 36 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Hardcopy stands for Encapsulated Postscript Interleaf or HPGL si
234. patible with the current scan period setting forces the scan period to the minimum period implied by the selected rate By toggling the button next to the Interlaced option you can trigger on interlaced field one interlaced field two or both fields noninterlaced Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Scan Period 66 6675 Scan Rate amp 1 Interlace 66 567 US 6 Rate 1 15 20KH2 40 Rate 2 20 25KHz Rate 3 25 35KHz more 10f2 olololo o p BT source yne V Delay EEG Mode T class Chi Polarity Mode amp lt Video gt lt Custem gt Negative tines EHE 3 Holdoff oJoIo oJo OJO Figure 3 63 Video Trigger Scan Rate amp Interlace To Set Mode amp Holdoff You can change the holdoff time and select the trigger mode using this menu item See Triggering on page 2 31 for more details on mode and holdoff Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Mode amp Holdoff main gt Auto or Normal side see Figure 3 64 In Auto mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform even if a trigger does not occur In Normal mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform only if there is a valid trigger TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 129 Video Triggering Tek Run TORMES Sample Holdoff 50 Mode amp 100 Holdoff TORI wie Untrig d Normal Trig d Roll
235. plus package for domestic shipping Option 1F 225 grams 0 5 lbs Floppy Disk Drive only Option 3P 11 3 kg 25 Ibs for the instrument and Printer Pack includes a pouch a printer with a full roll of paper all cables and three additional rolls of paper 4 5 kg 10 Ibs for Printer Pack when packaged for domestic shipping includes a pouch a printer as received from the vendor a Tektronix manual cables and five rolls of paper TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 7 Appendix B Nominal Traits Table B 8 Nominal Traits Mechanical Cont Name Overall Dimensions Description Standard digitizing oscilloscope Height 191 mm 7 5 in when feet and accessories pouch are installed 165 mm 6 5 in without the accessories pouch installed Width 381 mm 15 in with handle Depth 471mm 18 55 in oscilloscope only 490 mm 19 28 in with optional front cover installed 569 mm 22 4 in with handle fully extended Rackmount digitizing oscilloscope Height 178 mm 7 0 in Width 483 mm 19 0 in Depth 472 mm 18 6 in without front panel handles 517 mm 20 35 in with front panel handles installed Option 3P Height 241 mm 9 5 in Width 381 mm 15 0 in Depth 569 mm 22 4 in TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Nominal Traits 471 mm 327 2 mm 18 55 in 12 88 in 165 mm 6 5 in
236. quivalent Time or Interpolated Waveform Rates in Table B 3 on page B 5 2 You set the maximum external clock rate using the Horizontal Clock menu B 18 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification Table B 17 Typical Characteristics Triggering System Name Description Error Trigger Position Edge Triggering Acquire Mode Trigger Position Error Sample Hi Res Average 1 WI 1 ns Peak Detect Envelope 2 WI 1 ns Holdoff Variable Main Trigger Internal Main Horizontal Scale Minimum Holdoff Maximum Holdoff Clock and non TV Trigger lt 100 ns div 1 us 5 x Min Holdoff gt 100 ms div ls 5 x Min Holdoff Otherwise 10 x sec div 5 x Min Holdoff Holdoff Variable External Clock 0 to 100 ms Lowest Frequency for Successful Opera 20 Hz tion of Set Level to 50 Function Sensitivity Edge Trigger NotDC Coupled Video Mode Option 05 Equipped Instru ments Only Trigger Coupling AC Noise Reject High Frequency Reject Low Frequency Reject Typical Signal Level for Stable Triggering Same as DC coupled limits4 for frequencies above 60 Hz Attenuates signals below 60 Hz Three and one half times the DC coupled limits 4 One and one half times the DC coupled limits4 from DC to 30 kHz Attenuates signals above 30 kHz One and one half times the DC coupled limits4 for frequencies above 80 kHz Attenuates signals below 80 kHz Line Rate Class Four classes
237. r menu 3 28 Accessories A 1 A 8 Optional A 5 A 8 Probes A 4 A 5 A 6 Software A 8 Standard A 4 A 6 A 8 Accuracy Glossary 1 Acquire menu 3 9 3 53 Average 3 9 mode 3 54 Compare Chl to 3 55 Compare Ch2 to 3 55 Create Limit Test Template 3 54 Envelope 3 9 H Limit 3 55 Hardcopy if Condition Met 3 56 Hi Res 3 9 Limit Test 3 56 Limit Test Condition Met 3 56 Limit Test Setup 3 56 Limit Test Sources 3 55 Mode 3 9 OFF Real Time Only 3 10 OK Store Template 3 55 ON Enable ET 3 10 Peak Detect 3 9 Repetitive Signal 3 10 Ring Bell if Condition Met 3 56 RUN STOP 3 11 Sample 3 9 Single Acquisition Sequence 3 11 Stop After 3 10 3 56 Stop After Limit Test Condition Met 3 56 Template Source 3 54 V Limit 3 54 ACQUIRE MENU button 3 9 3 53 Acquisition 2 39 2 42 3 111 Glossary 1 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Interval Glossary 1 Modes Average 3 8 Envelope 3 8 Hi Res 3 7 Peak detect 3 5 Sample 3 5 Readout 3 9 Active cursor Glossary 1 Active voltage probes 3 84 3 88 active Saved waveform status 3 101 Algorithms C 1 C 14 Aliasing 2 45 Glossary 1 Amplitude 3 59 Glossary 1 Amplitude Units Cursor menu 3 120 Area 3 59 Glossary 1 Attenuation Glossary 1 Auto Main Trigger menu 3 29 Auto Video Trigger menu 3 129 Automated Measurements Snapshot of 2 27 Automated measurements 2 24 2 47 3 59 Automatic trigger mode 2 32 Glo
238. rable 2 35 2 38 Delayed Triggerable Horizontal menu 3 16 3 49 Delete Refs Save Recall Waveform menu 3 102 Delete File Utilities menu 3 32 Deskjet 3 35 Deskjet Hardcopy menu 3 36 Differential active probes 3 85 Digitizing Glossary 3 Digitizing rate 1 1 Disk How to save a hardcopy to 3 40 Disk drive 3 31 3 34 Display 2 6 3 111 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Options 3 21 3 26 Record View 2 37 System Glossary 3 Display T Trigger Point Display menu 3 22 DISPLAY button 3 21 Display menu 3 21 Contrast 3 22 Cross Hair 3 24 Display T Trigger Point 3 22 Dots 3 21 Dots style 3 55 Filter 3 23 Format 3 24 Frame 3 24 Full 3 24 Graticule 3 24 3 26 Grid 3 24 Infinite Persistence 3 22 Intensified Samples 3 22 Intensity 3 22 3 26 Linear interpolation 3 23 NTSC 3 24 Overall 3 22 PAL 3 24 Readout 3 22 Sin x x interpolation 3 23 Style 3 21 Text Grat 3 22 Trigger Bar 3 23 Variable Persistence 3 22 Vectors 3 21 Waveform 3 22 XY 3 24 YT 3 24 Dots 3 21 Dots style Display menu 3 55 Dots Display menu 3 21 DPU411 II Hardcopy menu 3 36 DPU412 Hardcopy menu 3 36 Dual Wfm Math More menu 3 132 Dual Zoom Zoom menu 3 137 Dual Zoom Offset Zoom menu 3 137 Dual lead adapter 3 79 Duty cycle 2 25 Glossary 6 Glossary 7 E Edge trigger 2 32 3 27 Glossary 3 Readout 3 27 Edge Main Trigger menu 2 38 3
239. rd All record points before the trigger event make up the pretrigger portion of the the waveform record Every record point after the trigger event is part of the posttrigger portion All timing measurements in the waveform record are made relative to that trigger event Record Length The number of points that make up the waveform record is defined by the record length You can set the record length in the Horizontal menu The digitizing oscilloscope provides record lengths of 500 1000 2500 5000 15000 and 30000 points Option IM provides a maximum record length of 120 000 points That option is available only at the time of original purchase it cannot be installed later Real Time Sampling In real time sampling the oscilloscope digitizes all the points it acquires after one trigger event see Figure 2 27 Use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events Record Points en Sampling Rate JUUUUUUUUUL Figure 2 27 Real Time Sampling Depending on how many channels you are using and the speed of the time base at some point the digitizing oscilloscope will not get enough samples to create a waveform record At that point the digitizing oscilloscope creates the waveform record in one of two ways depending on whether you have limited the oscillo scope to real time sampling or enabled equivalent time sampling you make that choice in the Acquisition menu During real time sampling the digitizing oscilloscope uses a pr
240. rd immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product 4 A m DANGER Protective Ground ATTENTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Referto Insulated Manual X TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Preface Related Manuals This is the User Manual for the TDS 410A TDS 420A and TDS 460 A Digitizing Oscilloscopes If you are a new user use the Getting Started section to become familiar with the operation of your digitizing oscilloscope The Concepts section covers basic principles of the operation of the oscilloscope These articles help you understand why your oscilloscope works the way it does Use the In Detail section to learn how to perform specific tasks See page 3 1 for a complete list of tasks covered in that section The Appendices provide an option and accessories listing product specification and other useful information The following documents are related to the use or service of the digitizing oscilloscope m The TDS Family Programmer Manual describes using a computer to control the digitizing oscilloscope through the GPIB interface m The TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A Reference gives you a quick overview of how to operate your digitizing oscilloscope m The TDS 410A T
241. real time rates expressed in samples second at which a digitizer samples signals at its inputs and stores the samples in memory to produce a record of time sequential samples The range of waveform rates for equivalent time or interpolated waveform records The Waveform Rate WR is the equivalent sample rate of a waveform record For a waveform record acquired by real time sampling of a single acquisition the waveform rate is the same as the real time sample rate for a waveform created by interpolation of real time samples from a single acquisition or by equivalent time sampling of multiple acquisitions the waveform rate is faster than the real time sample rate For all three cases the waveform rate is 1 Waveform Interval for the waveform record where the waveform interval WI is the time between the samples in the waveform record In Hi Res the maximum Option 1M record length is 60 000 points You set the maximum external clock rate using the Horizontal Clock menu The Hi Res samples are averaged over a 10 to 40 ns shorter period than shown by the readout Table B 4 Nominal Traits Triggering System Name Range Events Delay Description 1 to 9 999 999 Ranges Trigger Level or Threshold Source Range Any Channel 12 divisions from center of screen Line 400 Volts TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 5 Appendix B Nominal Traits Table B 5 Nominal Traits Display System Name Des
242. related to the power line frequency Examples include devices such as lighting equipment and power supplies Because the digitizing oscilloscope generates the trigger you do not have to input a trigger signal TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 31 Tutorial 2 32 A tS Auxiliary Trigger is a trigger source useful in digital design and repair For example you might want to trigger with an external clock or with a signal from another part of the circuit To use the auxiliary trigger connect the external triggering signal to the AUX TRIGGER EXT CLOCK connector on the oscilloscope rear panel Trigger Types The digitizing oscilloscope provides two types of triggers for the main trigger system edge and video These triggers are described in the Reference section Edge Triggering starts on page 3 27 and Video Triggering starts on page 3 125 A brief definition of each type follows Edge is the basic trigger You can use it with both analog and digital test circuits An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal the trigger circuit is monitoring passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction the trigger slope Video triggers available as Option 05 help simplify the triggering and viewing of video TV signals The video trigger option lets you trigger on positive or negative sync pulses It lets you select interlaced field one interlaced field two both fields or noninter
243. rform the following tasks to connect input signals to the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes to reset it and to become acquainted with its display screen Once completed these tasks ready the digitizing oscilloscope for use in the examples that follow Connect the Input Signal Remove all probes and signal inputs from the input BNC connectors along the lower right of the front panel Then using one of the probes supplied with the digitizing oscilloscope connect from the CH 1 connector of the digitizing oscilloscope to the PROBE ADJ connector Figure 2 1 0 Figure 2 1 Connecting a Probe for the Examples TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 13 Tutorial Reset the Oscilloscope Do the following steps to reset the digitizing oscilloscope to a known factory default state Reset the oscilloscope anytime you begin a new task and need to start fresh with known default settings 1 Press the save recall SETUP button to display the Setup menu see Figure 2 2 SAVE RECALL APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE MENU WAVEFORM MEASURE HARDCOPY _RUN STOP STATUS UTILITY SETUP CURSOR DISPLAY SHIFT SETUP Button OK Confirm Factory Init a iG Figure 2 2 SETUP Button Location The digitizing oscillos
244. rigger P oint Complete Waveform Record N 0 0 0 0 Acquisitions y 0 O Stop 0 0 E 0 ew Data 0 Old Data L After Trigger olololololc gt Trigger Point olol gt gt K gt Figure 3 44 Roll Mode 500 Point Record Length 3 94 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Roll Mode Triggered Roll Triggered Roll with Single Sequence To Turn On Roll Mode Triggered roll mode displays newly acquired data points at the selected trigger position and moves older waveform data points to the left When the pretrigger portion of the waveform record is filled and a valid trigger is received the waveform stops moving left and new data points are displayed to the right of old data points When a complete waveform record is acquired the sequence restarts Use triggered roll to capture a succession of triggered events in normal interac tive debugging Triggered roll mode with single sequence displays newly acquired data points at the selected trigger position and moves older waveform data points to the left When the pretrigger portion of the waveform record is filled and a valid trigger is received the waveform stops moving left and new data points are displayed to the right of old data points When the waveform record is full acquisitions stop Use triggered roll with single sequence to capture one triggered event Do the following steps to turn on
245. ription Limits 0 5 V base top 5 into a 1 MQ load 1 kHz 5 Characteristic Output Voltage and Frequency Probe Compensator Voltage Frequency Table B 13 Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements Description 90 to 132 VACams continuous range for 48 Hz through 62 Hz 100 to 132 VACRms continuous range for 48 Hz through 440 Hz 180 to 250 VACg ms continuous range for 48 Hz through 440 Hz Power Consumption lt 240 Watts 370 VA Name Source Voltage and Frequency B 14 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix B Specification Table B 14 Warranted Characteristics Environmental Safety and Reliability Name Description Atmospherics Temperaturel Standard Instrument Operating 0 C to 50 C Nonoperating 40 C to 75 C Instrument with Option IF Operating 4 C to 50 C Nonoperating 22 C to 60 C Option 3P Operating 0 C to 40 C Nonoperating 20 C to 60 C Relative humidity Standard Instrument 0 to 95 at or below 30 C 0 to 75 31 C to 450 C Instrument with Option 1F Operating without disk to 80 at or below 29 C to 20 at or below 50 C Operating with disk 20 to 80 at or below 32 C Nonoperating 20 to 30 at 45 C To 90 ator below 40 C to 50 ator below 50 C Option 3P Operating 30 to 80 Nonoperating 95 at 40 C Altitude Operating to 15 000 ft 4570 m Nonoper
246. rve the change in the displayed waveform and the channel readout at the bottom of the display EE VERTICAL ME HORIZONTAL ZA POSITION lt PosiTION gt VY O ZOOM VERTICAL HORIZONTAL MENU MENU lt SCALE gt Figure 2 6 The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls 2 Turn the vertical POSITION knob first one direction then the other Observe the change in the displayed waveform Then return the waveform to the center of the graticule TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 17 Tutorial 3 Turn the horizontal SCALE knob one click clockwise Observe the time base readout at the bottom of the display The time base should be set to 200 us div now and you should see two complete waveform cycles on the display Autoset the Oscilloscope When you first connect a signal to a channel and display it the signal displayed may not be scaled and triggered correctly Use the autoset function and you should quickly get a meaningful display You should have a stable display of the probe compensation waveform from the last step Do the following steps to first create an unstable display and then to automatically obtain a stable display 1 To create an unstable display slowly turn the trigger MAIN LEVEL knob see Figure 2 7 first one direction then the other Observe what happens when you move the trigger level above the highest part of the displayed waveform Leave the trigger level in that untriggered state 2 Press AUTOSET se
247. s Slip on G a ip on Groun Lead Standard Ss IS Adapter Optional A we Aligator Clip Ground ga 2 Lead Standard Retractable Hook Tip PR v Fe er Pr Standard he we Ze KlipC hip A w Low Inductance Spring Standard Tip Optional Low Inductance p Op Ground Lead Standard Figure 3 35 Probe Accessories TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 73 Probe Accessories 3 74 Retractable Hook Tip Marker Rings Long Ground Leads The retractable hook tip attaches to your signal test point for hands free operation of the probe The hook tip attaches to components having leads such as resistors capacitors and discrete semiconductors You can also grip stripped wire jumpers busses and test pins with the retractable hook For maximum flexibility with the hook tip use one of the six inch ground leads For precise measurements at high frequency however long ground leads may have too much inductance In these cases you can use one of the low inductance probe tip configurations instead To remove the hook tip simply pull it off the probe Reinstall it by pushing it firmly onto the ribbed ferrule of the probe tip see Figure 3 35 The marker rings help you keep track of individual probes and signal sources when you have a complicated test setup Use the marker rings whenever you want to identify a particular probe Use long ground leads when a long reach is important and high frequency
248. s for the zoomed waveform are displayed To select which waveforms are controlled by the horizontal and vertical scale and offset controls indicated by photo corners on the graticule corners containing the waveforms see Figure 3 68 press Selected Graticule main gt Upper or Lower side ve Tek Run aes Sample en Time 2 260m5 Zoom Mode off Zoomed Waveforms Zoom Boxes Unzoomed Waveform Reset Zoom EA fou Preview on m Dual Zoom ON Eat DZ Offset SPERREN DIES RL BB EEE tithe hoe HERREN ER oy ee UMS u electe Mode Lock Graticule Reset Upper DJ am Toomi f M S500us chi F Ololololo To reset all zoom factors to their defaults see Table 3 5 press ZOOM gt Reset main gt Reset All Factors side To reset only live waveform zoom factors to their defaults press ZOOM gt Reset main gt Reset Live Factors side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Zoom Table 3 5 Zoom Defaults Parameter Setting Zoom Vertical Position 0 Zoom Vertical Gain 1x Zoom Horizontal Position Tracking Horizontal Position Zoom Horizontal Gain 1x Dual Zoom Offset 0 0 Press ZOOM Mode main gt Off side to return to normal oscilloscope non zoom operation For More Information See Acquisition
249. s in Appendix B Specifications and in the TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A Performance Verification and Specifications that is shipped as a standard accessory with TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes 1 2 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Start Up Operation Installation A Before you use the digitizing oscilloscope ensure that it is properly installed and powered on To properly install and power on the digitizing oscilloscope do the following steps Be sure you have the appropriate operating environment Specifications for temperature relative humidity altitude vibrations and emissions are included in Appendix B Specifications at the rear of this manual Leave space for cooling Do this by verifying that the air intake and exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet where the fan operates are free of any airflow obstructions Leave at least 2 inches 5 1 cm free on each side WARNING To avoid electrical shock be sure that the power cord is disconnected before checking the fuse 3 Check the fuse to be sure it is the proper type and rating see Figure 1 1 for the fuse location You can use either of two fuses see Table 1 1 for the fuse data Check that you have the proper electrical connections The digitizing oscilloscope requires 90 to 132 V for 48 through 62 Hz 100 to 132 V or 180 to 250 V for 48 through 440 Hz and may require up to 240 W Connect the proper power cord from the rear pan
250. setting of the channel used Expressed as a voltage a DL is equal to 1 25 of a division times the volts division setting 4 The values given are the maximum absolute difference between the value at the end of a specified time interval after the mid level crossing of the step and the value one second after the mid level crossing of the step expressed as a percentage of the step amplitude Table B 16 Typical Characteristics Time Base System Name Description Aperture Uncertainty For real time or interpolated records having duration lt 1 minute lt 50 ps 0 03 ppm x Record Duration RMS For equivalent time records lt 50 ps 0 06 ppm x WIT RMS Fixed Error in Sample Time lt 50 ps External Clock sampling uncertainty 8 ns External Clock Edge to Sampling Time Sample 20 ns Sample edge is delayed relative the the sample moment Relay HiRes Hi Res averaging starts within 8 ns of the clock enge Averaging stops after 1 maximun external clock rate Peak Detect Runs continuously at 100 MS s External Clock Minimum Prerecord points 55 points before the first visible sample in the record at the maximum clock speed 35 points before the first visible sample in the record at slow clock speeds External Clock Minimum Postrecord points 25 points after the last visible sample in the record 1 The WI waveform interval is the time between the samples in the waveform record Also see the footnotes for Sample Rate Range and E
251. signed to accept a larger probe tip These accessories include the IC protector tip single and dual lead adapters and others To install the adapter unscrew and remove the ribbed ferrule and screw the adapter on in its place The IC protector tip discussed below is installed on the adapter tip when shipped Remove the protector tip by pulling it off before using the adapter with other accessories The IC protector tip simplifies probing inline IC packages The shape of the IC protector guides the probe tip to the IC pin and prevents accidental shorting of pins by the probe tip It is used with the compact to miniature probe tip adapter When using that tip the spacing pitch between leads should be greater than or equal to 0 100 inches 100 mils Because the IC protector tip prevents you from using the low inductance tips you must use one of the longer ground leads For that reason you should take into account ground lead inductance effects on measurements at frequencies greater than about 30 MHz TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Probe Accessories Dual Lead Adapter The dual lead adapter makes an easy connection to 0 025 diameter connector pins One lead connects to a ground reference pin and the other to the signal pin The adapter prevents burring and pin damage that can result when a retractable hook tip is used on soft pins A single lead adapter is also available These adapters can also be used with the SM
252. sors Figure 3 53 Cursor Types Use the cursors to measure the difference either in time or voltage between two locations in a waveform record This section describes cursors how to select their type and mode how to display them and how to use them to take measurements Cursors are two markers that you position with the general purpose knob You move one cursor independently or both cursors in tandem depending on the cursor mode As you position the cursors readouts on the display report and update measurement information There are three cursor types horizontal bar vertical bar and paired see Figure 3 53 Vertical Bar Cursors Paired Cursors Horizontal bar cursors measure vertical parameters typically volts Vertical bar cursors measure horizontal parameters typically time or frequency Paired cursors measure both vertical parameters typically volts and horizontal parameters typically time simultaneously Look at Figure 3 53 Note that each of the two paired cursors has a long vertical bar paired with an X The Xs measure vertical parameters typically volts the long vertical bars measure horizontal parameters typically time or frequency See Cursor Readouts on page 3 116 for more information TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 115 Taking Cursor Measurements NOTE When cursors measure certain math waveforms the measurement may not be of time frequency or voltage Cursor measurem
253. source waveforms Dual waveform math uses three of the four waveforms For example if you display a math waveform that is the sum of CH I and CH 2 even if CH 1 and CH 2 are not displayed you have used three waveforms Therefore you can only display one additional waveform 1 Press MORE gt Mathl Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math waveform definition side gt Dual Wfm Math main see Figure 3 66 2 To define the first source waveform press Set 1st Source to side repeated ly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform 3 To define the second source waveform press Set 2nd Source to side repeatedly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform 4 Toenter the math operator press Set operator to side repeatedly to cycle it through the choices Supported operators are and 5 Press OK Create Math Wfm side to perform the function NOTE If you select for multiply in step 4 the cursor feature measures amplitude in the units volts squared VV rather than in volts V TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Waveform Math Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Ist Source Ch1 Change Math Definition o Set ist Source to Set operator to Set 2nd Source to Select the type of Math function to define from ch2 the bottom row of bezel buttons Define the new function using the side buttons When you are satisfied with the selec
254. splayed on the side menu using the following information m The selection you choose defines which edges you want the delayed measurement to be made between m The upper waveform on each icon represents the from waveform and the lower one represents the to waveform m The direction arrows on the choices let you specify a forward search on both waveforms or a forward search on the from waveform and a backwards search on the to waveform The latter choice is useful for isolating a specific pair of edges out of a stream 4 To take the measurement you just specified press Delay To main gt OK Create Measurement side To exit the Measure Delay menu without creating a delay measurement press CLEAR MENU which returns you to the Measure menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 67 Measuring Waveforms Take a Snapshot of Measurements Sometimes you may want to see all of the automated measurements on screen at the same time To do so use Snapshot Snapshot executes all of the single waveform measurements available on the selected waveform once and displays the results The measurements are not continuously updated All of the measurements listed in Table 3 3 on page 3 59 except for Delay and Phase are displayed Delay and Phase are dual waveform measurements and are not available with Snapshot The readout area for a snapshot of measurements is a pop up display that covers about 80 of the graticule area when
255. ssary 2 Autoset 2 18 2 46 3 111 3 112 Glossary 2 Defaults 3 111 How to execute 3 111 3 112 AUTOSET button 2 18 3 111 Auxiliary trigger 2 32 Average mode Acquire menu 3 54 Average acquisition mode 3 8 Glossary 2 Average Acquire menu 3 9 Bandwidth 1 1 2 42 3 122 Glossary 2 Bandwidth Vertical menu 3 123 Banner menu 3 20 Base Cursor menu 3 120 Before you begin 1 5 1 6 BMP 3 35 BMP Color Hardcopy menu 3 36 BMP Mono Hardcopy menu 3 36 Burst width 3 59 Button ACQUIRE MENU 3 9 3 53 AUTOSET 2 18 2 45 3 111 CLEAR MENU 2 3 2 8 2 16 2 25 3 67 CURSOR 2 48 3 117 DELAYED TRIG 2 35 3 16 DISPLAY 3 21 Index 1 Index FORCE TRIG 2 36 HARDCOPY 3 31 3 36 3 91 HELP 3 3 HORIZONTAL MENU 2 35 3 14 MEASURE 3 62 MORE 3 103 3 108 3 131 ON STBY 1 4 2 3 Save Recall SETUP 2 14 3 31 3 97 Save Recall WAVEFORM 3 31 3 101 SELECT 3 118 Glossary 9 SET LEVEL TO 50 2 35 SINGLE TRIG 2 36 3 11 STATUS 3 19 TOGGLE 2 48 TRIGGER MENU 2 38 3 27 3 125 UTILITY 3 36 3 91 VERTICAL MENU 2 21 WAVEFORM OFF 2 23 3 25 3 108 ZOOM 2 46 3 136 Buttons CH1 CH2 3 108 Channel selection 2 20 3 108 Main menu 2 3 Side menu 2 3 C Cables 3 91 Cart Instrument K212 A 2 Centronics Port optional 3 37 3 43 3 89 Certificate of Calibration A 3 CH1 CH2 buttons 3 108 Chl Ch2 Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 Chl Ch2 Main Trigger menu 3 28 3 50
256. st Source to More menu 3 132 Set 2nd Source to More menu 3 132 Set Function to More menu 3 132 SET LEVEL TO 50 button 2 35 Set Levels in units Measure menu 3 65 Set operator to More menu 3 132 Set Single Source to More menu 3 132 Set to 10 Horizontal menu 3 48 Set to 50 Delayed Trigger menu 3 18 Set to 50 Horizontal menu 3 48 Set to 50 Main Trigger menu 2 35 3 29 Set to 90 Horizontal menu 3 48 Set to ECL Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Index 9 Index Set to ECL Main Trigger menu 3 29 Set to TTL Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Set to TTL Main Trigger menu 3 29 Set to Zero Vertical menu 3 123 Setting Up for the Examples 2 13 Setup menu 2 14 Setups Save and recall 3 97 3 100 Shipping D 1 Side menu Glossary 8 Side menu buttons 2 3 Glossary 8 Signal Path Compensation 1 5 1 6 3 113 3 114 Glossary 8 Sin x x interpolation 2 40 3 23 Glossary 5 Sin x x interpolation Display menu 3 23 Single Acquisition Sequence Acquire menu 3 11 SINGLE TRIG button 2 36 3 11 Single Wfm Math More menu 3 131 Single Shot sampling 2 40 Slope Glossary 8 Slope Delayed Trigger menu 3 17 Slope Main Trigger menu 3 29 Slope Trigger 2 34 SMT KlipChip 3 76 A 7 Snapshot Readout 3 68 Snapshot of Measurements 2 27 3 68 Snapshot Measure menu 3 68 Software 1 1 Software version 3 19 Source Delayed Trigger menu 3 16 Source Main Trigger menu 3 28 3 50 Source Video Trigger menu 3 126 SPC
257. t r I Uses highest and lowest samples in two intervals Use to reveal aliasing and for glitch detection Provides the benefits of enveloping with the speed of a single acquisition k AN J OS Nr s o a Hi Res a Calculates average of all samples in interval Use to reduce apparent noise Provides the benefits of averaging with the speed of a single acquisition AU Su Multiple Waveform Acquisitions Acquisition Three Acquisitions from One Source Mode CIOJO C O Waveform Drawn onCRT Acquisition 1 2 3 Pi A lei AU Envelope Be Finds highest and Uses Peak Detect Mode for Each Acquisition lowest record points over fact ap z many acquisitions Use to reveal variations in the signal across time as as on fon fo sea Calculates average value for Uses Sample Mode for Each Acquisition each record point over thet en many acquisitions Use to reduce apparent noise in a repetitive signal yacq Figure 3 2 How the Acquisition Modes Work
258. t instrument settings into that setup location Remember which setup location you selected for use later There are more setup locations than can be listed at one time in the side menu The more side menu item gives you access to all the setup locations Once you have saved a particular setup you can change the settings as you wish knowing that you can come back to that setup at any time 8 Press MEASURE gt Positive Width side to add that measurement to the display To recall the setup press SETUP gt Recall Saved Setup main gt Recall Setup side for the setup location you used in the last exercise The positive width measurement is now removed from the display because you selected it after you saved the setup This completes the examples You can restore the default settings by pressing SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Triggering Triggering Concepts ACM To use the TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscope to measure or monitor waveforms you need a stable display of those waveforms This section covers the basic concepts of triggering and then describes the various types available This oscilloscope also has a delayed trigger system It is described starting on page 3 13 If your oscilloscope has the Option 5 Video Trigger it is described starting on page 3 125 Triggers determine when the digitizing oscilloscope
259. the Horizontal SCALE to 20 ms per division or faster 2 To turn off roll mode even if the Horizontal SCALE is 50 ms per division or slower press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Controls main and set Roll Mode side to Off 3 If you are in a single sequence roll mode and want to leave single sequence mode press SHIFT gt ACQ MENU gt Stop After main gt RUN STOP side Tek Single Seq 500 575 Holdoff 0 Mode amp Holdoff Roll Trigger Mode Indicators Normal Trig d Roll 100mV M 100ms Chif 142mV Source Coupling Slope Level noge TYPE amp lt Edge gt chi BE T 722 mV Holdoff elelee eee Figure 3 45 Trigger Mode Menu For More Information See Trigger Modes on page 2 32 3 96 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C Saving and Recalling Setups To Save a Setup TDS 400A Digitizing Oscilloscopes can store up to ten oscilloscope setups in internal memory that you may later recall This section describes how you save and recall a setup and how you can recall the factory default setup You may want to save and reuse setups for many reasons For example after changing the setting during the course of an experiment you may want to quickly return to your original setup Saved setups are retained even when you turn the oscilloscope off or unplug it To save the current setup of t
260. the current selected waveform Side menu Menu that appears to the right of the display These selections expand on main menu selections Side menu buttons Bezel buttons to the right of the side menu display They allow you to select items in the side menu Signal Path Compensation SPC The ability of the oscilloscope to minimize the electrical offsets in the vertical horizontal and trigger amplifiers caused by ambient temperature changes and component aging You should run SPC at the following times when the ambient temperature varies more than 5 C from the last SPC when using settings equal to or less than 5 mV per division and when performing critical measurements Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horizontal quantity The two values are rising and falling TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary Tek Secure This feature erases all waveform and setup memory locations setup memories are replaced with the factory setup Then it checks each location to verify erasure This feature finds use where this digitizing oscilloscope is used to gather security sensitive data such as is done for research or development projects Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform record The time base determines wh
261. the horizontal position setting affects all displayed waveforms just the live waveforms or only the selected waveform See Zoom on page 3 135 for the steps to set the horizontal lock feature To select between the Main and Delayed views of the time base Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Time Base main gt Main Only Intensi fied or Delayed Only side TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Horizontal Control NOTE If external clock is enabled selecting Intensified intensifies the entire time base By pressing Intensified you display an intensified zone that shows where the delayed trigger record length could occur relative to the main trigger To learn how to change the intensity of the normal and intensified waveform see Display Modes on page 3 21 You also can select Delayed Runs After Main or Delayed Triggerable For more information on the delayed trigger see Delayed Triggering on page 3 13 Horizontal Clock To change the horizontal clock Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Clock main gt Internal or External side and use the general purpose knob to change the scale values NOTE When you select External clock the unzoomed horizontal scale changes to 50 c indicating 50 clocks per division When using Option 2F external clock and cursors to measure frequency the displayed frequency is normalized to the external Clock frequency To calculate the actual frequency multiply the displayed frequency by the
262. til the sample min and max pair DO NOT straddle MidRef TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms 2 Ifthe pair gt MidRef use the minima else use maxima If all pairs straddle MidRef use maxima See Figure C 4 The Burst Width measurement always uses both maxima and minima to determine crossings Missing or Out of Range Samples If some samples in the waveform are missing or off scale the measurements linearly interpolate between known samples to make an appropriate guess as to the sample value Missing samples at the ends of the measurement record are assumed to have the value of the nearest known sample When samples are out of range the measurement gives a warning to that effect for example CLIPPING if the measurement could change by extending the measurement range slightly The algorithms assume the samples recover from an overdrive condition instantaneously TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 13 Appendix C Algorithms C 14 MidR ef Both min and max samples are above MidR ef so use minima Both min and max samples are below MidR ef so use maxima MidR ef Figure C 4 Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope Measurements For example if MidRef is set directly then MidRef would not change even if samples were out of range However if MidRef was chosen using the choice from the Set Levels in Units selection of the Measure menu t
263. tion of the waveform record divided by the record length The digitizing oscilloscope displays one data point for every acquisition interval Active cursor The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob It is represented in the display by a solid line The readout on the display shows the absolute value of the active cursor Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when a digitizing oscilloscope digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on the oscilloscope may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Amplitude The High waveform value less the Low waveform value Area Measurement of the waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the gated region Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe or attenuator That is the ratio of the input measure to the output measure For example a 10X probe will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 UU Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the oscilloscope to automatically acq
264. tions press Create Math wfm we Press CLEAR MENU to return to the More menu without creating a Math waveform OK ingle Wimibi ETM Math Math Ololololololo OlolIolo Create Math wfm Figure 3 66 Dual Waveform Math Menus To Select a Math Waveform For More Information To select a waveform that you want to display press MORE Math1 Math2 or Math3 main Single and dual waveform math operations are described separately in the previous topics NOTE If your digitizing oscilloscope is equipped with Option 2F Advanced DSP Math the menu item FFT will be at the same brightness as the menu items Single Wfm Math and Dual Wfm Math otherwise FFT will be dimmed See the TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual for information on FFTs and other advanced math waveforms If your oscilloscope is equipped with option 2F you can also create integrated differentiated and Fast Fourier Transform waveforms If your oscilloscope is equipped with that option see the TDS Family Option 2F Instruction Manual TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 133 Waveform Math 3 134 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Zoom At times you may want to expand or compress zoom in or out a waveform on the display without changing the acquisition parameters You can do that with the zoom feature This section describes how to use zoom and how
265. to a file press save recall WAVEFORM gt Save Format main gt Internal MathCAd or Spreadsheet side see Figure 3 49 Three formats are available m Internal creates files WFM in the internal format of the oscilloscope m MathCad creates files DAT in a format usable by MathCad 3 104 DAT files are supported by the MathCad numerical analysis program DAT file data is read line by line and placed into variables in the MathCad document You then do whatever calculations are required The DAT format begins with four values acting as a header containing the record length time per sample interval trigger location and trigger offset followed by a linear array of ASCII floating point Y values The recordLength pre trigger sample count and trigger offset are in samples The horizontal scale per sample is in x units and the y value is in y units Spreadsheet creates files CSV in a format usable by most spreadsheets Excel Lotus 1 2 3 and Quattro Pro CSV files Comma Separated Values contain comma separated X and Y ASCII values on CRLF terminated lines a 2 dimensional array Each value is a floating point number There is one line for each point in a waveform record The X and Y values are displayed in the units of seconds and Volts All scaling to sample increments and offsetting has been done Zero on the X scale is the trigger point with negative values being pretrigger and positive values being posttrigger TDS
266. to measure This section is called the gated region Do the following steps to gate a measurement 1 Press MEASURE gt Gating main gt Gate with V Bar Cursors side see Figure 3 29 2 Using the general purpose knob move the selected the active cursor Press SELECT to change which cursor is active Displaying the cursor menu and turning V Bar cursors off does not turn gating off Gating arrows remain on screen to indicate the area over which the measurement is gated You must turn gating off in the Gating side menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 63 Measuring Waveforms Define High Low Setup 3 64 NOTE Cursors are displayed relative to the selected waveform If you are making a measurement using two waveforms this can be a source of confusion If you turn off horizontal locking and adjust the horizontal position of one waveform independent of the other the cursors appear at the requested position with respect to the selected waveform Gated measurements remain accurate but the displayed positions of the cursors change when you change the selected waveform Tek Run 100KS s Ep pe 3 if A 2 03ms 1 23ms Eu EEEEEEEEREE SEEzEee C cht Ampi I 304mV 2oomv T M s00yus Chit 108mv ee EN 7 Remove Menage Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot for chi Measrmnt Histogram revels olololololo lo
267. triggering on noise To Set Slope To select the slope that the edge trigger occurs on 1 Press the TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Edge pop up gt Slope main a id 2 Select the rising or falling edge from the side menu We To Set Level Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side Level lets you enter the trigger level using the general purpose knob Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V NOTE When you set the volts div smaller than 200 mV the oscilloscope reduces the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels This happens because the trigger level range is fixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V or ECL 1 3 V level Set to 50 fixes the trigger level to approximately 50 of the peak to peak value of the trigger source signal To Set Mode amp Holdoff You can select the trigger mode and change the holdoff time using this menu item See Triggering on page 2 31 for more details 1 Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Mode amp Holdoff main gt Auto or Normal side The modes operate as follows m In Auto mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform after a specific time has elapsed even if a trigger does not occur The amount of
268. ts Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Graticule Cursor and Automated Measurements 2 47 Cursor Modes 6 5 02055 2 8 ee 2 49 Initial Help Screen ccc cece cece cece ceeee 3 4 How the Acquisition Modes Work 4 3 6 Acquisition Menu and Readout e008 3 9 Acquire Menu Stop After ccc ce eeeeee 3 11 Delayed Runs After Main cccceececeecs 3 13 Delayed Triggerable ccc cece cesses ccece 3 13 How the Delayed Triggers Work 0ee000 3 15 Delayed Trigger Menu ccccccccsscsccecs 3 17 Status Menu System cece cece cs cceces 3 19 Banner Display ccccecccccccccsccscces 3 20 Display Menu Style cece eee ees eeeees 3 21 Trigger Point and Level Indicators 3 23 Edge Trigger Readouts ccceccecsccecees 3 27 Main Trigger Menu Edge Type 3 28 File Utilities ua 3 31 File System Labelling Menu 3 33 Utility Menu System VO
269. tus page 3 5 page 2 31 4 EY oi N Tek 250k575 Trigger Level 220mV i 1 ern nt Coarse Khi ane Waveform Record Icon Indicates position of vertical bar cursors in the waveform record page 3 121 When the general purpose knob is activated the knob icon appears here Shows what partof the waveform record is displayed page 3 45 Tek Ki 250K575 2305 Trigger Level 220mW amp Trigger level on i A racial Cursor Measurements waveform may be an lt page 3 115 arrow at right side of ay i Level screen instead of a bar k t u Set to TTL The side menu with choices of specific actions Channel Level and Set to ECL Waveform Source Set to 50 Trigger Parameters page 2 37 The main menu with choices Horizontal Scale and Time of major actions Base Type page 3 45 2 6 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual At a Glance To Operate a Menu 1 Press front panel menu button Tektronix TDS 460A banene ostiuoscore 00 ms SAVTECALLN APPLICATION MENU I ACQUIRNSNU measure HARDCOPY _RUN STOF UTILITY CURSOR DISPLAY 4 VERTICAL EEE TRIGGER IS A POSITION gt MAIN LEVEL See 7 TRIGD Er READY AVEFORM OF SINGLE TRIG O ARM CD FORCE TRIG Ore a A 1 Matspf son s CHa Hia A RS OHS
270. typical while maintaining the higher input resistance of passive probes 10 kQ to 10 MQ Like Zo probes active probes are useful for making accurate timing and phase measurements However they do not degrade the amplitude accuracy Active probes typically have a dynamic range of 10 to 15 V Differential Probes and Differential probes and preamplifiers determine the voltage drop between two Preamplifiers points in a circuit without reference to ground Differential probes and amplifiers let you simultaneously measure two points and to display the difference between the two voltages Common mode rejection removes unwanted common mode electrical noise from sensitive pickups Differential preamplifiers allow direct measurements of very low amplitude voltages and signals without reference to ground Active differential probes and preamplifiers are stand alone products designed to be used with 50 Q inputs The same characteristics that apply to active probes apply to active differential probes Fixtured Active Probes In some small geometry or dense circuitry applications such as surface mounted devices SMD a hand held probe is too big to be practical You can instead use fixtured or probe card mounted active probes or buffered amplifiers to precisely connect your oscilloscope to your device under test These probes have the same electrical characteristics as high speed active probes but use a smaller mechanical design TDS 410A TDS 420
271. ual to the frequency set in the external clock side menu If the frequency ofthe external clock signal is greater than the frequency set in the side menu the displayed waveform will have the wrong amplitude and often the wrong shape Hi Res mode increases resolution and limits bandwidth see Table 3 1 on page 3 8 As the Max Ext Clk rate is reduced resolution increases and bandwidth decreases Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Clock main gt External side and if in Hi Res mode use the general purpose knob to set the maximum external clock frequency CAUTION To prevent damage to the external clock and external trigger circuitry do not exceed the input voltage rating of the EXT CLOCK AUX TRIGGER input see Auxiliary Trigger Input External Clock Input on page B 14 Connect your TTL like external clock signal to the EXT CLOCK AUX TRIGGER BNC at the rear of the oscilloscope If your EXT CLK source can drive 50Q to TTL levels use a 50Q terminator Before connecting your external clock signal make certain the signal has TTL levels and a 30 us or faster falling edge In External Clock mode sampling occurs on the falling edge of the clock Connect the signals you wish to acquire to the input channels NOTE If you set the maximum clock frequency to 1 kHz do not connect an external clock with a frequency greater than I kHz If you do you may need to remove the external clock signal and turn the oscilloscope power off and then
272. uire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period Autoset A function of the oscilloscope that automatically produces a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up front panel controls based on the characteris tics of the active waveform A successful autoset sets the volts div time div and trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that is the averaged result of several acquisitions That reduces the apparent noise The oscilloscope acquires data as in sample mode and then averages it according to a specified number of averages Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the oscilloscope can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 0 707 attenuation of the original reference signal Burst width A timing measurement of the duration of a burst Channel One type of input used for signal acquisition Channel Reference Indicator The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset Coupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information is transferred from one to the other You can couple the input signal to the trigger and vertical systems several different ways Cursors Paire
273. uires a waveform record with the first valid trigger event and stops In Envelope or Average mode the digitizing oscilloscope makes the specified number of acquisitions to complete the averaging or enveloping task If the oscilloscope is in equivalent time mode and you press Single Acquisition Sequence side it continues to recognize trigger events and acquire samples until the waveform record is filled NOTE To quickly select Single Acquisition Sequence without displaying the Acquire and Stop After menus press SHIFT FORCE TRIG Now the RUN STOP button operates as just described You still must display the Acquire menu and then the Stop After menu to leave Single Acquisition Sequence operation TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 11 Acquisition Modes Limit Test Condition Met side lets you acquire waveforms until waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test Then acquisition stops At that point you can also specify other actions for the oscilloscope to take using the selections available in the Limit Test Setup main menu NOTE In order for the digitizing oscilloscope to stop acquisition when limit test conditions are met limit testing must be turned ON using the Limit Test Setup main menu Setting up limit testing requires several more steps You can create the template waveform against which to compare incoming waveforms using the Create Limit Test Template main menu item You can
274. und it becomes TLF Use linear interpolation if necessary 4 FallTime TLF THF TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix C Algorithms Frequency High Low Maximum Fall Time os THF TLF High HighR ef LowRef Low Figure C 2 Fall Time Timing measurement The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second If Period 0 or is otherwise bad return an error Frequency 1 Period 100 highest voltage reference value See High Low on page C 1 Using the min max measurement technique High Max 0 lowest voltage reference value calculated See High Low on page C 1 Using the min max measurement technique Low Min Amplitude voltage measurement The maximum voltage Typically the most positive peak voltage Examine all Waveform samples from Start to End inclusive and set Max equal to the greatest magnitude Waveform value found TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual C 7 Appendix C Algorithms Mean Minimum Negative Duty Cycle Negative Overshoot C 8 The arithmetic mean for one waveform Remember that one waveform is not necessarily equal to one cycle For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle mean rather than the arithmetic mean If Start End then return the interpolated value at Start Otherwise End Waveform t dt Mean Start End
275. vel or threshold level instantaneously no matter what menu if any is displayed To Set to 50 To quickly obtain an edge trigger press SET LEVEL TO 50 The oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the halfway point between the peaks of the trigger signal Set Level to 50 has no effect when the trigger type is video If edge trigger is selected you can also set the level to 50 in the Trigger menu under the main menu item Level Note that the MAIN LEVEL knob and menu items apply only to the main trigger level To modify the delayed trigger level use the Level item in the Delayed Trigger menu TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 2 35 Tutorial To Check Trigger Status 2 36 EEE TRIGGER EEE MAIN LEVEL DELAYED TRIG TRIGGER MENU Cc SET LEVEL 50 TRIG D TO Cs READY gt Trigger Status Lights SINGLETRIG ARM FORCE TRIG Figure 2 22 TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights To Force a Trigger To force the oscilloscope to immediately start acquiring a waveform record even without a trigger event press the FORCE TRIG front panel button Forcing a trigger is useful when in normal trigger mode and the input signal is not supplying a valid trigger By pressing FORCE TRIG you can quickly confirm that there is a signal present for the oscilloscope to acquire Once that is established you can determine how to trigger on it press SET LEVEL TO 50 check trigger source setting and so forth Th
276. verter You can put a GPIB to Centronics or GPIB to RS 232 interface converter box between the digitizing oscilloscope and the RS 232 or Centronics hardcopy device see Figure 3 22 For example a National Instruments GPIB PRL a GPIB to Centronics converter permits you to make screen prints on a Tektronix HC200 Dot Matrix printer with just a Centronics port TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual 3 43 Hardcopy For More Information 3 44 Digitizing Oscilloscope Centronics or RS 232 Cable GPIB to Centronics or GPIB Cable GPIB to RS 232 Converter Figure 3 22 Connecting the Digitizing Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a Converter See Remote Communication on page 3 89 See the TDS Family Option 13 Instruction Manual Option 13 equipped oscilloscopes only See the File System on page 3 31 Option IF equipped oscilloscopes only TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual SS 7 Horizontal Control You can control the horizontal part of the display the time base using the horizontal menu and knobs This section describes how to use the horizontal controls and menus To Check the Horizontal Status Check the Record View to determine the size and location of the waveform record and the location of the trigger relative to the display See Figure 3 23 Check the Time Base readout at the lower right of the display to see the time division settings and the time base
277. xecutes a one time capture of all measurements and does not update those measure ments unless it is performed again 2 Press Again side to do another snapshot and update the snapshot measure ments 3 Press Remove Measrmnt main to remove the snapshot display You can also press CLEAR MENU but a new snapshot will be executed the next time you display the Measure menu 2 28 TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Tutorial Example 4 Saving Setups The digitizing oscilloscope can save its control settings and recall them later to quickly re establish the previously saved state The oscilloscope provides ten storage locations to store up to ten setups It also provides a file system requires the optional file system so that you can also save setups to a floppy disk Do the following tasks to learn how to save and then recall a setup NOTE Besides being able to save several complete setups the digitizing oscilloscope remembers all the parameter settings when you power it off This lets you power on and continue where you left off without having to reconstruct the setup in effect when you powered off the digitizing oscilloscope Save a Setup First you need to create an instrument setup you want to save Perform the following steps to create and save a setup that is complex enough that you might prefer not to go through all these steps each time you want that display 1 If you are not continuing from the previ
278. y for offset control P6046 Active differential probe 1X 10X DC to 100 MHz 50 Q input AM 503S DC AC Current probe system AC DC Uses A6302 Current Probe AM 503S Option 03 DC AC Current probe system AC DC Uses A6303 Current Probe P6021 AC Current probe 120 Hz to 60 MHz P6022 AC Current probe 935 kHz to 120 MHz CT 1 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 25 kHz to 1 GHz 50 Q input CT 2 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 1 2 kHz to 200 MHz 50 Q input CT 4 Current Transformer for use with the AM 503S A6302 and P6021 Peak pulse 1 kA 0 5 Hz to 20 MHz with AM 503S A6302 TVC 501 Time to voltage converter Time delay pulse width and period measurements P6562A SMT Probe 350 MHz Table 3 6 lists optional accessories that are recommended for use with the standard probe listed under Standard Accessories on page A 4 Table A 5 Probe Accessories Accessory Part Number Connector BNC BNC to Probe Tip Adapter 013 0226 00 Connector BNC 50 Q BNC to Probe Tip Adapter 013 0227 00 Connector Probe Package of 100 compact 131 4244 00 Connector Probe Package of 25 compact 131 5031 00 Screwdriver Adjustment Tool Package of five 003 1433 01 Compact to Miniature Probe Tip Adapter 013 0202 02 Probe Tip Holder holds three tips 352 0670 00 3 Inch Slip On Ground Lead 196 3113 03 Probe Holder Black ABS 352 035
279. yed Time Base To change the horizontal scale time per division numerically in the menu instead of using the Horizontal SCALE knob NOTE If external clock is enabled and zoom is disabled the Horizontal SCALE knob has no effect and both the Horizontal Main Scale and Delayed Scale are the same 50 c If zoom is enabled you can change the displayed scale but the Delayed Scale is locked to the Main Scale Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Controls main gt Main Scale or Delayed Scale side and use the general purpose knob to change the scale values NOTE When you set the Horizontal SCALE to 50 ms or slower and the Roll Mode Status is Automatic or if the horizontal Clock menu is set t0 External and the maximum external sample rate is set to 1 kc per second maximum or less the oscilloscope enters Roll mode You can read about Roll mode beginning on page 3 93 You can turn Roll Mode off or allow roll mode to turn on and off automatically see Roll Mode on page 3 93 for more information Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Controls main PressRoll Mode side to toggle Roll Mode between OFF and Auto To set the horizontal position to specific values in the menu instead of using the Horizontal POSITION knob Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Pos main gt Set to 10 Set to 50 or Set to 90 side to choose how much of the waveform is displayed to the left of the display center You can also control whether changing
280. ystem Name Description Accuracy DC Voltage Measurement Measurement Type DC Accuracy NotAveraged Any Sample 1 5 x reading NetOffset Offset Accuracy 0 13 div 0 6 mV Delta Volts between any two samples 1 5 x reading 0 26 div 1 2 mV Frequency Limit Upper 100 MHz Band 100 MHz width Limited Frequency Limit Upper 20 MHz Band 20 MHz width Limited Nonlinearity lt 1DL differential lt 1 DL integral independently based Analog Bandwidth DC 1 MQ Coupled with Volts Div TDS 410A and TDS 420A TDS 460A Standard Accessory Probe Attached Bandwidth Bandwidth 5 mV div 10 V div DC 200 MHz DC 400 MHz 2 mV div 4 98 mV div DC 150 MHz DC 250 MHz 1 mV div 1 99 mV div DC 100 MHz DC 100 MHz TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual B 17 Appendix B Specification Table B 15 Typical Characteristics Signal Acquisition System Cont Name Description Step Response Settling Error Volts Div Setting Step Amplitude Settling Error TVS V 10 mvv 985 ml 1 V div 10 V div 1 Net Offset Offset Position x Volts Div Net Offset is the voltage level at the center of the A D converter dynamic range Offset Accuracy is the accuracy of this voltage level 2 The samples must be acquired under the same setup and ambient conditions 3 ADL digitization level is the smallest voltage level change that can be resolved by the 8 bit A D Converter with the input scaled to the volts division
281. zontal time base Main only Limit Testing Off Limit Testing hardcopy if condition met Off TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Appendix E Factory Initialization Settings Table E 1 Factory Initialization Defaults Cont Control Changed by Factory Init to Limit Testing ring bell if condition met 0 Main trigger holdoff Auto Main trigger type Edge Math definition Ch1 Ch2 Math2 definition Ch1 Ch2 FFT of Ch1 for Option 2F instruments ath3 definition easure Delay to easure Delay edges Inv of Ch 1 Channel 1 Ch1 Both rising and forward searching easure High Low Setup easure Low Ref easure Mid Ref Histogram 90 and 0 V units 10 and 0 V units 50 and 0 V units M M M M Measure High Ref M M M easure Mid2 Ref 50 and 0 V units Roll mode Automatic Sample rate 100 kS s Save R ecall waveform Recall format Internal Save R ecall waveform Save format Internal Saved setups No change Saved waveforms No change Trigger delay by Runs After Vertical bandwidth all channels Full Vertical coupling all channels DC Vertical impedance termination 1MQ all channels Vertical offset all channels OV Vertical position all channels 0 divs Vertical volts div all channels 100 mV div Video custom scan period 66 667 us Video custom rate Rate 1 Zoom horizontal all channels 2 0X Zoom horizontal lock All
282. zontal zoom factor using the horizontal SCALE knob Adjust the horizontal position of the zoomed waveform using the horizontal POSITION knob Press ZOOM gt Lock main gt All Live or None side to choose which waveforms to zoom Depending on the selection for Lock in the side menu zoom affects the displayed waveforms as follows None only the waveform currently selected can be magnified and positioned horizontally Figure 3 67 Live all live as opposed to reference waveforms can be magnified and positioned horizontally at the same time If a reference or math waveform is selected and Horizontal Lock set to Live only the selected reference or math waveform is magnified and positioned All all waveforms displayed live math and reference can be magnified and positioned horizontally at the same time TDS 410A TDS 420A amp TDS 460A User Manual Zoom NOTE Although zoom must be turned on to control which waveforms zoom affects the setting for Lock affects which waveforms the horizontal control positions whether zoom is on or off The rules for the three settings are as listed in step 5 Tek Run 250kS 5 Sample ch2200m 0 1XVert 5 0XHorz Horizontal Lock Live None Only the selected waveform the bottom one changes size OIIO ch 2 00 vo 1 00 M4D 0us chi 2 40 V Mode Tock Graticule Reset Upper eS gt S

User Manual TDS 410A, TDS 420A & TDS 460A - TRS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual TDS 410A, TDS 420A &amp; TDS 460A - TRS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual TDS 410A, TDS 420A & TDS 460A - TRS